This commit was manufactured by cvs2svn to create tag 'WX_2_2_9'.
git-svn-id: https://svn.wxwidgets.org/svn/wx/wxWidgets/tags/WX_2_2_9@13364 c3d73ce0-8a6f-49c7-b76d-6d57e0e08775
@@ -38,8 +38,9 @@ a reference to your application object) to be visible to other files.
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor. Called implicitly with a definition of a wxApp object.
|
||||
|
||||
The argument is a language identifier; this is an experimental
|
||||
feature and will be expanded and documented in future versions.
|
||||
% VZ: there is no such feature so far...
|
||||
% The argument is a language identifier; this is an experimental
|
||||
% feature and will be expanded and documented in future versions.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxApp::\destruct{wxApp}}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -457,7 +458,7 @@ deleted. If FALSE, the application will continue to run.}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the `top' window. You can call this from within \helpref{wxApp::OnInit}{wxapponinit} to
|
||||
let wxWindows know which is the main window. You don't have to set the top window;
|
||||
it's only a convenience so that (for example) certain dialogs without parents can use a
|
||||
it is only a convenience so that (for example) certain dialogs without parents can use a
|
||||
specific window as the top window. If no top window is specified by the application,
|
||||
wxWindows just uses the first frame or dialog in its top-level window list, when it
|
||||
needs to use the top window.
|
||||
|
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ wxArrayDouble class is scheduled for the next release of wxWindows).
|
||||
wxSortedArray is a wxArray variant which should be used when searching in the
|
||||
array is a frequently used operation. It requires you to define an additional
|
||||
function for comparing two elements of the array element type and always stores
|
||||
its items in the sorted order (according to this function). Thus, it's
|
||||
its items in the sorted order (according to this function). Thus, it is
|
||||
\helpref{Index()}{wxarrayindex} function execution time is $O(log(N))$ instead of
|
||||
$O(N)$ for the usual arrays but the \helpref{Add()}{wxarrayadd} method is
|
||||
slower: it is $O(log(N))$ instead of constant time (neglecting time spent in
|
||||
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ example:
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
#include <wx/dynarray.h>
|
||||
|
||||
// we must forward declare the array because it's used inside the class
|
||||
// we must forward declare the array because it is used inside the class
|
||||
// declaration
|
||||
class MyDirectory;
|
||||
class MyFile;
|
||||
@@ -249,7 +249,6 @@ This macro defines a new sorted array class named {\it name} and containing
|
||||
the elements of type {\it T}. The second form is used when compiling DLL
|
||||
under Windows and array needs to be visible outside the DLL.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
@@ -259,7 +258,7 @@ class MyClass;
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_ARRAY(MyClass *, wxArrayOfMyClass);
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
You will have to initialize the objects of this class by passing a comparaison
|
||||
You will have to initialize the objects of this class by passing a comparison
|
||||
function to the array object constructor like this:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
@@ -356,7 +355,7 @@ Default constructor initializes an empty array object.
|
||||
\func{}{wxSortedArray}{\param{int (*)(T first, T second)}{compareFunction}}
|
||||
|
||||
There is no default constructor for wxSortedArray classes - you must initialize it
|
||||
with a function to use for item comparaison. It is a function which is passed
|
||||
with a function to use for item comparison. It is a function which is passed
|
||||
two arguments of type {\it T} where {\it T} is the array element type and which
|
||||
should return a negative, zero or positive value according to whether the first
|
||||
element passed to it is less than, equal to or greater than the second one.
|
||||
@@ -530,14 +529,14 @@ the array classes.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{\void}{Remove}{\param{T }{item}}
|
||||
|
||||
Removes the element from the array either by value: the first item of the
|
||||
Removes an element from the array by value: the first item of the
|
||||
array equal to {\it item} is removed, an assert failure will result from an
|
||||
attempt to remove an item which doesn't exist in the array.
|
||||
|
||||
When an element is removed from wxObjArray it is deleted by the array - use
|
||||
\helpref{Detach()}{wxobjarraydetach} if you don't want this to happen. On the
|
||||
other hand, when an object is removed from a wxArray nothing happens - you
|
||||
should delete the it manually if required:
|
||||
should delete it manually if required:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
T *item = array[n];
|
||||
@@ -552,11 +551,11 @@ elements of a wxArray (supposed to contain pointers).
|
||||
|
||||
\func{\void}{RemoveAt}{\param{size\_t }{index}}
|
||||
|
||||
Removes the element from the array either by index. When an element
|
||||
Removes an element from the array by index. When an element
|
||||
is removed from wxObjArray it is deleted by the array - use
|
||||
\helpref{Detach()}{wxobjarraydetach} if you don't want this to happen. On the
|
||||
other hand, when an object is removed from a wxArray nothing happens - you
|
||||
should delete the it manually if required:
|
||||
should delete it manually if required:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
T *item = array[n];
|
||||
|
@@ -80,6 +80,20 @@ reasons it is not virtual, so this class should not be derived from.
|
||||
|
||||
Assignment operator.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxArrayString::operator==}\label{wxarraystringoperatorequal}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{operator $==$}{\param{const wxArrayString\&}{ array}}
|
||||
|
||||
Compares 2 arrays respecting the case. Returns TRUE only if the arrays have
|
||||
the same number of elements and the same strings in the same order.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxArrayString::operator!=}\label{wxarraystringoperatornotequal}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{operator $!=$}{\param{const wxArrayString\&}{ array}}
|
||||
|
||||
Compares 2 arrays respecting the case. Returns TRUE if the arrays have
|
||||
different number of elements or if the elements don't match pairwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxArrayString::operator[]}\label{wxarraystringoperatorindex}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxString\&}{operator[]}{\param{size\_t }{nIndex}}
|
||||
@@ -205,23 +219,19 @@ Returns the last element of the array. Attempt to access the last element of
|
||||
an empty array will result in assert failure in debug build, however no checks
|
||||
are done in release mode.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxArrayString::Remove (by value)}\label{wxarraystringremoveval}
|
||||
\membersection{wxArrayString::Remove}\label{wxarraystringremove}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Remove}{\param{const char *}{ sz}}
|
||||
|
||||
Removes the first item matching this value. An assert failure is provoked by
|
||||
an attempt to remove an element which does not exist in debug build.
|
||||
|
||||
See also: \helpref{Index}{wxarraystringindex}, \helpref{Remove}{wxarraystringremove}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxArrayString::Remove (by index)}\label{wxarraystringremove}
|
||||
See also: \helpref{Index}{wxarraystringindex}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Remove}{\param{size\_t }{nIndex}}
|
||||
|
||||
Removes the item at given position.
|
||||
|
||||
See also: \helpref{Remove}{wxarraystringremoveval}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxArrayString::Shrink}\label{wxarraystringshrink}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Shrink}{\void}
|
||||
@@ -231,7 +241,7 @@ minimize the array memory consumption.
|
||||
|
||||
See also: \helpref{Alloc}{wxarraystringalloc}, \helpref{Dynamic array memory management}{wxarraymemorymanagement}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxArrayString::Sort (alphabetically)}\label{wxarraystringsort}
|
||||
\membersection{wxArrayString::Sort}\label{wxarraystringsort}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Sort}{\param{bool}{ reverseOrder = FALSE}}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -242,10 +252,6 @@ Sorts the array in alphabetical order or in reverse alphabetical order if
|
||||
could break the order of items and, for example, subsequent calls to
|
||||
\helpref{Index()}{wxarraystringindex} would then not work!
|
||||
|
||||
See also: \helpref{Sort}{wxarraystringsortcallback}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxArrayString::Sort (user defined)}\label{wxarraystringsortcallback}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Sort}{\param{CompareFunction }{compareFunction}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sorts the array using the specified {\it compareFunction} for item comparison.
|
||||
@@ -280,5 +286,3 @@ array.Sort(CompareStringLen);
|
||||
could break the order of items and, for example, subsequent calls to
|
||||
\helpref{Index()}{wxarraystringindex} would then not work!
|
||||
|
||||
See also: \helpref{Sort}{wxarraystringsort}
|
||||
|
||||
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 225 B After Width: | Height: | Size: 978 B |
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ almost any other window.
|
||||
|
||||
A bitmap button can be supplied with a single bitmap, and wxWindows will draw
|
||||
all button states using this bitmap. If the application needs more control, additional bitmaps for
|
||||
the selected state, unpressed focussed state, and greyed-out state may be supplied.
|
||||
the selected state, unpressed focused state, and greyed-out state may be supplied.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Window styles}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -29,7 +29,11 @@ the selected state, unpressed focussed state, and greyed-out state may be suppli
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxBU\_AUTODRAW}}{If
|
||||
this is specified, the button will be drawn automatically using the label bitmap only, providing
|
||||
a 3D-look border. If this style is not specified, the button will be drawn without borders and using all
|
||||
provided bitmaps.}
|
||||
provided bitmaps. WIN32 only.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxBU\_LEFT}}{Left-justifies the bitmap label. WIN32 only.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxBU\_TOP}}{Aligns the bitmap label to the top of the button. WIN32 only.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxBU\_RIGHT}}{Right-justifies the bitmap label. WIN32 only.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxBU\_BOTTOM}}{Aligns the bitmap label to the bottom of the button. WIN32 only.}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
|
||||
@@ -115,7 +119,7 @@ Button creation function for two-step creation. For more details, see \helpref{w
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxBitmapButton::GetBitmapDisabled}\label{wxbitmapbuttongetbitmapdisabled}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxBitmap\&}{GetBitmapLabel}{\void}
|
||||
\constfunc{wxBitmap\&}{GetBitmapDisabled}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the bitmap for the disabled state.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -131,11 +135,11 @@ A reference to the disabled state bitmap.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxBitmap\&}{GetBitmapFocus}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the bitmap for the focussed state.
|
||||
Returns the bitmap for the focused state.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
A reference to the focussed state bitmap.
|
||||
A reference to the focused state bitmap.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ portable programs: in this case the {\it bits} parameter should contain an XBM
|
||||
image.
|
||||
|
||||
For other bit depths, the behaviour is platform dependent: under Windows, the
|
||||
data is passed withotu any changes to the underlying {\tt CreateBitmap()} API.
|
||||
data is passed without any changes to the underlying {\tt CreateBitmap()} API.
|
||||
Under other platforms, only monochrome bitmaps may be created using this
|
||||
constructor and \helpref{wxImage}{wximage} should be used for creating colour
|
||||
bitmaps from static data.
|
||||
@@ -505,20 +505,14 @@ Sets the validity member (does not affect the bitmap data).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxBitmap::SetPalette}\label{wxbitmapsetpalette}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetPalette}{\param{wxPalette* }{palette}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetPalette}{\param{const wxPalette\& }{palette}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the associated palette: it will be deleted in the wxBitmap
|
||||
destructor, so if you do not wish it to be deleted automatically,
|
||||
reset the palette to NULL before the bitmap is deleted.
|
||||
Sets the associated palette.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{palette}{The palette to set.}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
The bitmap object owns the palette once this has been called.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxPalette}{wxpalette}
|
||||
|
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ in Windows Help, HTML and Word RTF formats.
|
||||
\item Simple-to-use, object-oriented API.
|
||||
\item Flexible event system.
|
||||
\item Graphics calls include lines, rounded rectangles, splines, polylines, etc.
|
||||
\item Constraint-based and sizer-based layouting.
|
||||
\item Constraint-based and sizer-based layouts.
|
||||
\item Print/preview and document/view architectures.
|
||||
\item Toolbar, notebook, tree control, advanced list control classes.
|
||||
\item PostScript generation under Unix, normal MS Windows printing on the PC.
|
||||
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ them to the clipboard.
|
||||
\item Ready-to-use HTML window (supporting a subset of HTML).
|
||||
\item Dialog Editor for building dialogs.
|
||||
\item Network support via a family of socket and protocol classes.
|
||||
\item Support for platform independent image procesing.
|
||||
\item Support for platform independent image processing.
|
||||
\item Built-in support for many file formats (BMP, PNG, JPEG, GIF, XPM, PNM, PCX).
|
||||
\end{itemize}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Additions and changes:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\item class hierarchy changed, and restrictions about subwindow nesting lifted;
|
||||
\item header files reorganised to conform to normal C++ standards;
|
||||
\item header files reorganized to conform to normal C++ standards;
|
||||
\item classes less dependent on each another, to reduce executable size;
|
||||
\item wxString used instead of char* wherever possible;
|
||||
\item the number of separate but mandatory utilities reduced;
|
||||
@@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Additions and changes:
|
||||
\item Many optical improvements to GTK port.
|
||||
\item Support for menu accelerators in GTK port.
|
||||
\item Enhanced and improved support for scrolling, including child windows.
|
||||
\item Complete rewrite of clipboard and drag'n'drop classes.
|
||||
\item Complete rewrite of clipboard and drag and drop classes.
|
||||
\item Improved support for ODBC databases.
|
||||
\item Improved tab traversal in dialogs.
|
||||
\end{itemize}
|
||||
@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Julian Smart\\
|
||||
Uppingham\\
|
||||
Rutland\\
|
||||
LE15 9SG\\
|
||||
julian.smart@ukonline.co.uk
|
||||
julian.smart@btopenworld.com
|
||||
|
||||
\section{Acknowledgments}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ fine on some platforms, and then fail under Windows.
|
||||
\section{Architecture dependency}
|
||||
|
||||
A problem which sometimes arises from writing multi-platform programs is that
|
||||
the basic C types are not defiend the same on all platforms. This holds true
|
||||
the basic C types are not defined the same on all platforms. This holds true
|
||||
for both the length in bits of the standard types (such as int and long) as
|
||||
well as their byte order, which might be little endian (typically
|
||||
on Intel computers) or big endian (typically on some Unix workstations). wxWindows
|
||||
@@ -492,7 +492,7 @@ its own run-time type information system, implemented using macros.
|
||||
|
||||
Some compilers (e.g. the native IRIX cc) define NULL to be 0L so that
|
||||
no conversion to pointers is allowed. Because of that, all these
|
||||
occurences of NULL in the GTK port use an explicit conversion such
|
||||
occurrences of NULL in the GTK port use an explicit conversion such
|
||||
as
|
||||
|
||||
{\small
|
||||
@@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ X and Windows parts of the library) conditional
|
||||
compilation that under Unix, includes a minimal set of headers;
|
||||
and when using Visual C++, includes {\tt wx.h}. This should help provide
|
||||
the optimal compilation for each compiler, although it is
|
||||
biassed towards the precompiled headers facility available
|
||||
biased towards the precompiled headers facility available
|
||||
in Microsoft C++.
|
||||
|
||||
\section{File handling}
|
||||
@@ -577,7 +577,7 @@ more easily accessed via the Contributions page on the Web site.
|
||||
wxHelp is a stand-alone program, written using wxWindows,
|
||||
for displaying hypertext help. It is necessary since not all target
|
||||
systems (notably X) supply an adequate
|
||||
standard for on-line help. wxHelp is modelled on the MS Windows help
|
||||
standard for on-line help. wxHelp is modeled on the MS Windows help
|
||||
system, with contents, search and browse buttons, but does not reformat
|
||||
text to suit the size of window, as WinHelp does, and its input files
|
||||
are uncompressed ASCII with some embedded font commands and an .xlp
|
||||
@@ -690,9 +690,9 @@ it can alert you to problems later on.
|
||||
\subsection{Use wxString in preference to character arrays}
|
||||
|
||||
Using wxString can be much safer and more convenient than using char *.
|
||||
Again, I haven't practised what I'm preaching, but I'm now trying to use
|
||||
Again, I haven't practiced what I'm preaching, but I'm now trying to use
|
||||
wxString wherever possible. You can reduce the possibility of memory
|
||||
leaks substantially, and it's much more convenient to use the overloaded
|
||||
leaks substantially, and it is much more convenient to use the overloaded
|
||||
operators than functions such as strcmp. wxString won't add a significant
|
||||
overhead to your program; the overhead is compensated for by easier
|
||||
manipulation (which means less code).
|
||||
@@ -721,7 +721,7 @@ kinds of bitmap depending on platform (see the section on resource files).
|
||||
|
||||
\subsection{Positive thinking}
|
||||
|
||||
It's common to blow up the problem in one's imagination, so that it seems to threaten
|
||||
It is common to blow up the problem in one's imagination, so that it seems to threaten
|
||||
weeks, months or even years of work. The problem you face may seem insurmountable:
|
||||
but almost never is. Once you have been programming for some time, you will be able
|
||||
to remember similar incidents that threw you into the depths of despair. But
|
||||
@@ -748,8 +748,8 @@ deallocation, this can still give totally spurious results!
|
||||
|
||||
\subsection{Use a debugger}
|
||||
|
||||
This sounds like facetious advice, but it's surprising how often people
|
||||
don't use a debugger. Often it's an overhead to install or learn how to
|
||||
This sounds like facetious advice, but it is surprising how often people
|
||||
don't use a debugger. Often it is an overhead to install or learn how to
|
||||
use a debugger, but it really is essential for anything but the most
|
||||
trivial programs.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -778,13 +778,13 @@ See the \helpref{debugging overview}{debuggingoverview} for further information.
|
||||
|
||||
\subsection{Check Windows debug messages}
|
||||
|
||||
Under Windows, it's worth running your program with
|
||||
Under Windows, it is worth running your program with
|
||||
\urlref{DbgView}{http://www.sysinternals.com} running or
|
||||
some other program that shows Windows-generated debug messages. It's
|
||||
possible it'll show invalid handles being used. You may have fun seeing
|
||||
some other program that shows Windows-generated debug messages. It is
|
||||
possible it will show invalid handles being used. You may have fun seeing
|
||||
what commercial programs cause these normally hidden errors! Microsoft
|
||||
recommend using the debugging version of Windows, which shows up even
|
||||
more problems. However, I doubt it's worth the hassle for most
|
||||
more problems. However, I doubt it is worth the hassle for most
|
||||
applications. wxWindows is designed to minimize the possibility of such
|
||||
errors, but they can still happen occasionally, slipping through unnoticed
|
||||
because they are not severe enough to cause a crash.
|
||||
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 242 B After Width: | Height: | Size: 440 B |
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
|
||||
\section{\class{wxBoxSizer}}\label{wxboxsizer}
|
||||
|
||||
The basic idea behind a box sizer is that windows will most often be laid out in rather
|
||||
simple basic geomerty, typically in a row or a column or several hierachies of either.
|
||||
simple basic geometry, typically in a row or a column or several hierarchies of either.
|
||||
|
||||
As an exmaple, we will construct a dialog that will contain a text field at the top and
|
||||
As an example, we will construct a dialog that will contain a text field at the top and
|
||||
two buttons at the bottom. This can be seen as a top-hierarchy column with the text at
|
||||
the top and buttons at the bottom and a low-hierchary row with an OK button to the left
|
||||
and a Cancel button to the right. In many cases (particulary dialogs under Unix and
|
||||
the top and buttons at the bottom and a low-hierarchy row with an OK button to the left
|
||||
and a Cancel button to the right. In many cases (particularly dialogs under Unix and
|
||||
normal frames) the main window will be resizable by the user and this change of size
|
||||
will have to get propagated to its children. In our case, we want the text area to grow
|
||||
with the dialog, whereas the button shall have a fixed size. In addition, there will be
|
||||
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ a thin border around all controls to make the dialog look nice and - to make mat
|
||||
the buttons shall be centred as the width of the dialog changes.
|
||||
|
||||
It is the unique feature of a box sizer, that it can grow in both directions (height and
|
||||
width) but can distribute its growth in the main direction (horizontal for a row) {\it unevenly}
|
||||
width) but can distribute its growth in the main direction (horizontal for a row) {\it unevenly}
|
||||
among its children. In our example case, the vertical sizer is supposed to propagate all its
|
||||
height changes to only the text area, not to the button area. This is determined by the {\it option} parameter
|
||||
when adding a window (or another sizer) to a sizer. It is interpreted
|
||||
@@ -24,8 +24,8 @@ relative to the sum of all weight factors of the sizer, so when adding two windo
|
||||
a value of 1, they will both get resized equally much and each half as much as the sizer
|
||||
owning them. Then what do we do when a column sizer changes its width? This behaviour is
|
||||
controlled by {\it flags} (the second parameter of the Add() function): Zero or no flag
|
||||
indicates that the window will preserve it's original size, wxGROW flag (same as wxEXPAND)
|
||||
forces the window to grow with the sizer, and wxSHAPED flag tells the window to change it's
|
||||
indicates that the window will preserve it is original size, wxGROW flag (same as wxEXPAND)
|
||||
forces the window to grow with the sizer, and wxSHAPED flag tells the window to change it is
|
||||
size proportionally, preserving original aspect ratio. When wxGROW flag is not used,
|
||||
the item can be aligned within available space. wxALIGN\_LEFT, wxALIGN\_TOP, wxALIGN\_RIGHT,
|
||||
wxALIGN\_BOTTOM, wxALIGN\_CENTER\_HORIZONTAL and wxALIGN\_CENTER\_VERTICAL do what they say.
|
||||
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ wxALIGN\_CENTER\_VERTICAL). Default alignment is wxALIGN\_LEFT | wxALIGN\_TOP.
|
||||
As mentioned above, any window belonging to a sizer may have border, and it can be specified
|
||||
which of the four sides may have this border, using the wxTOP, wxLEFT, wxRIGHT and wxBOTTOM
|
||||
constants or wxALL for all directions (and you may also use wxNORTH, wxWEST etc instead). These
|
||||
flags can be used in combintaion with the alignement flags above as the second paramter of the
|
||||
flags can be used in combination with the alignment flags above as the second parameter of the
|
||||
Add() method using the binary or operator |. The sizer of the border also must be made known,
|
||||
and it is the third parameter in the Add() method. This means, that the entire behaviour of
|
||||
a sizer and its children can be controlled by the three parameters of the Add() method.
|
||||
|
@@ -18,7 +18,13 @@ almost any other window.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Window styles}
|
||||
|
||||
There are no special styles for wxButton.
|
||||
\twocolwidtha{5cm}%
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxBU\_LEFT}}{Left-justifies the label. WIN32 only.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxBU\_TOP}}{Aligns the label to the top of the button. WIN32 only.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxBU\_RIGHT}}{Right-justifies the bitmap label. WIN32 only.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxBU\_BOTTOM}}{Aligns the label to the bottom of the button. WIN32 only.}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -6,18 +6,443 @@
|
||||
%% Created: 03.01.00
|
||||
%% RCS-ID: $Id$
|
||||
%% Copyright: (c) Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% Licence: wxWindows licence
|
||||
%% License: wxWindows license
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxCalendarCtrl}}\label{wxcalendarctrl}
|
||||
|
||||
The calendar control allows the user to pick a date interactively.
|
||||
The calendar control allows the user to pick a date interactively. For this,
|
||||
it displays a window containing several parts: the control to pick the month
|
||||
and the year at the top (either or both of them may be disabled) and a month
|
||||
area below them which shows all the days in the month. The user can move the
|
||||
current selection using the keyboard and select the date (generating
|
||||
{\tt EVT\_CALENDAR} event) by pressing {\tt <Return>} or double clicking it.
|
||||
|
||||
It has advanced possibilities for the customization of its display. All global
|
||||
settings (such as colours and fonts used) can, of course, be changed. But
|
||||
also, the display style for each day in the month can be set independently
|
||||
using \helpref{wxCalendarDateAttr}{wxcalendardateattr} class.
|
||||
|
||||
An item without custom attributes is drawn with the default colours and
|
||||
font and without border, but setting custom attributes with
|
||||
\helpref{SetAttr}{wxcalendarctrlsetattr} allows to modify its appearance. Just
|
||||
create a custom attribute object and set it for the day you want to be
|
||||
displayed specially (note that the control will take ownership of the pointer,
|
||||
i.e. it will delete it itself). A day may be marked as being a holiday, even
|
||||
if it is not reckognized as oen by \helpref{wxDateTime}{tdateholidays} using
|
||||
\helpref{SetHoliday}{wxcalendardateattrsetholiday} method.
|
||||
|
||||
As the attributes are specified for each day, they may change when the month
|
||||
is changed, so you will often want to update them in
|
||||
{\tt EVT\_CALENDAR\_MONTH} event handler.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxControl}{wxcontrol}\\
|
||||
\helpref{wxWindow}{wxwindow}\\
|
||||
\helpref{wxEvtHandler}{wxevthandler}\\
|
||||
\helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/calctrl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also:}
|
||||
\wxheading{Window styles}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{Calendar sample}{samplecalendar}
|
||||
\twocolwidtha{5cm}
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=4pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxCAL\_SUNDAY\_FIRST}}{Show Sunday as the first day in the week}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxCAL\_MONDAY\_FIRST}}{Show Monday as the first day in the week}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxCAL\_SHOW\_HOLIDAYS}}{Highlight holidays in the calendar}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxCAL\_NO\_YEAR\_CHANGE}}{Disable the year changing}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxCAL\_NO\_MONTH\_CHANGE}}{Disable the month (and, implicitly, the year) changing}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
The default calendar style is {\tt wxCAL\_SHOW\_HOLIDAYS}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Event table macros}
|
||||
|
||||
To process input from a calendar control, use these event handler macros to
|
||||
direct input to member functions that take a
|
||||
\helpref{wxCalendarEvent}{wxcalendarevent} argument.
|
||||
|
||||
\twocolwidtha{7cm}
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=7pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_CALENDAR(id, func)}}{A day was double clickedi n the calendar.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_CALENDAR\_SEL\_CHANGED(id, func)}}{The selected date changed.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_CALENDAR\_DAY(id, func)}}{The selected day changed.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_CALENDAR\_MONTH(id, func)}}{The selected month changed.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_CALENDAR\_YEAR(id, func)}}{The selected year changed.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_CALENDAR\_WEEKDAY\_CLICKED(id, func)}}{User clicked on the week day header}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}%
|
||||
|
||||
Note that changing the selected date will result in either of
|
||||
{\tt EVT\_CALENDAR\_DAY}, {\tt MONTH} or {\tt YEAR} events and
|
||||
{\tt EVT\_CALENDAR\_SEL\_CHANGED} one.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Constants}
|
||||
|
||||
The following are the possible return values for
|
||||
\helpref{HitTest}{wxcalendarctrlhittest} method:
|
||||
{\small \begin{verbatim}
|
||||
enum wxCalendarHitTestResult
|
||||
\{
|
||||
wxCAL_HITTEST_NOWHERE, // outside of anything
|
||||
wxCAL_HITTEST_HEADER, // on the header (weekdays)
|
||||
wxCAL_HITTEST_DAY // on a day in the calendar
|
||||
\};
|
||||
\end{verbatim}}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{Calendar sample}{samplecalendar}\\
|
||||
\helpref{wxCalendarDateAttr}{wxcalendardateattr}\\
|
||||
\helpref{wxCalendarEvent}{wxcalendarevent}
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::wxCalendarCtrl}\label{wxcalendarctrlwxcalendarctrldef}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxCalendarCtrl}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Default constructor, use \helpref{Create}{wxcalendarctrlcreate} after it.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::wxCalendarCtrl}\label{wxcalendarctrlwxcalendarctrl}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxCalendarCtrl}{\param{wxWindow* }{parent}, \param{wxWindowID }{id}, \param{const wxDateTime\& }{date = wxDefaultDateTime}, \param{const wxPoint\& }{pos = wxDefaultPosition}, \param{const wxSize\& }{size = wxDefaultSize}, \param{long }{style = wxCAL\_SHOW\_HOLIDAYS}, \param{const wxString\& }{name = wxCalendarNameStr}}
|
||||
|
||||
Does the same as \helpref{Create}{wxcalendarctrlcreate} method.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::Create}\label{wxcalendarctrlcreate}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Create}{\param{wxWindow* }{parent}, \param{wxWindowID }{id}, \param{const wxDateTime\& }{date = wxDefaultDateTime}, \param{const wxPoint\& }{pos = wxDefaultPosition}, \param{const wxSize\& }{size = wxDefaultSize}, \param{long }{style = wxCAL\_SHOW\_HOLIDAYS}, \param{const wxString\& }{name = wxCalendarNameStr}}
|
||||
|
||||
Creates the control. See \helpref{wxWindow}{wxwindowctor} for the meaning of
|
||||
the parameters and the control overview for the possible styles.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::\destruct{wxCalendarCtrl}}\label{wxcalendarctrldtor}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{\destruct{wxCalendarCtrl}}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Destroys the control.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::SetDate}\label{wxcalendarctrlsetdate}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetDate}{\param{const wxDateTime\& }{date}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the current date.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::GetDate}\label{wxcalendarctrlgetdate}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxDateTime\&}{GetDate}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the currently selected date.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::EnableYearChange}\label{wxcalendarctrlenableyearchange}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableYearChange}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
|
||||
|
||||
This function should be used instead of changing {\tt wxCAL\_NO\_YEAR\_CHANGE}
|
||||
style bit directly. It allows or disallows the user to chaneg the year
|
||||
interactively.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::EnableMonthChange}\label{wxcalendarctrlenablemonthchange}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableMonthChange}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
|
||||
|
||||
This function should be used instead of changing
|
||||
{\tt wxCAL\_NO\_MONTH\_CHANGE} style bit. It allows or disallows the user to
|
||||
change the month interactively. Note that if the month can not be changed, the
|
||||
year can not be changed neither.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::EnableHolidayDisplay}\label{wxcalendarctrlenableholidaydisplay}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableHolidayDisplay}{\param{bool }{display = TRUE}}
|
||||
|
||||
This function should be used instead of changing {\tt wxCAL\_SHOW\_HOLIDAYS}
|
||||
style bit directly. It enables or disables the special highlighting of the
|
||||
holidays.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::SetHeaderColours}\label{wxcalendarctrlsetheadercolours}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetHeaderColours}{\param{const wxColour\& }{colFg}, \param{const wxColour\& }{colBg}}
|
||||
|
||||
Set the colours used for painting the weekdays at the top of the control.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::GetHeaderColourFg}\label{wxcalendarctrlgetheadercolourfg}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxColour\&}{GetHeaderColourFg}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the foreground colour of the header part of the calendar window.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{SetHeaderColours}{wxcalendarctrlsetheadercolours}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::GetHeaderColourBg}\label{wxcalendarctrlgetheadercolourbg}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxColour\&}{GetHeaderColourBg}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the background colour of the header part of the calendar window.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{SetHeaderColours}{wxcalendarctrlsetheadercolours}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::SetHighlightColours}\label{wxcalendarctrlsethighlightcolours}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetHighlightColours}{\param{const wxColour\& }{colFg}, \param{const wxColour\& }{colBg}}
|
||||
|
||||
Set the colours to be used for highlighting the currently selected date.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::GetHighlightColourFg}\label{wxcalendarctrlgethighlightcolourfg}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxColour\&}{GetHighlightColourFg}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the foreground highlight colour.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{SetHighlightColours}{wxcalendarctrlsethighlightcolours}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::GetHighlightColourBg}\label{wxcalendarctrlgethighlightcolourbg}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxColour\&}{GetHighlightColourBg}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the background highlight colour.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{SetHighlightColours}{wxcalendarctrlsethighlightcolours}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::SetHolidayColours}\label{wxcalendarctrlsetholidaycolours}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetHolidayColours}{\param{const wxColour\& }{colFg}, \param{const wxColour\& }{colBg}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the colours to be used for the holidays highlighting (only used if the
|
||||
window style includes {\tt wxCAL\_SHOW\_HOLIDAYS} flag).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::GetHolidayColourFg}\label{wxcalendarctrlgetholidaycolourfg}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxColour\&}{GetHolidayColourFg}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Return the foregound colour currently used for holiday highlighting.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{SetHolidayColours}{wxcalendarctrlsetholidaycolours}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::GetHolidayColourBg}\label{wxcalendarctrlgetholidaycolourbg}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxColour\&}{GetHolidayColourBg}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Return the background colour currently used for holiday highlighting.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{SetHolidayColours}{wxcalendarctrlsetholidaycolours}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::GetAttr}\label{wxcalendarctrlgetattr}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxCalendarDateAttr *}{GetAttr}{\param{size\_t }{day}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the attribute for the given date (should be in the range $1\ldots31$).
|
||||
|
||||
The returned pointer may be {\tt NULL}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::SetAttr}\label{wxcalendarctrlsetattr}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetAttr}{\param{size\_t }{day}, \param{wxCalendarDateAttr* }{attr}}
|
||||
|
||||
Associates the attribute with the specified date (in the range $1\ldots31$).
|
||||
|
||||
If the pointer is {\tt NULL}, the items attribute is cleared.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::SetHoliday}\label{wxcalendarctrlsetholiday}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetHoliday}{\param{size\_t }{day}}
|
||||
|
||||
Marks the specified day as being a holiday in the current month.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::ResetAttr}\label{wxcalendarctrlresetattr}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{ResetAttr}{\param{size\_t }{day}}
|
||||
|
||||
Clears any attributes associated with the given day (in the range
|
||||
$1\ldots31$).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::HitTest}\label{wxcalendarctrlhittest}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxCalendarHitTestResult}{HitTest}{\param{const wxPoint\& }{pos}, \param{wxDateTime* }{date = NULL}, \param{wxDateTime::WeekDay* }{wd = NULL}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns one of {\tt wxCAL\_HITTEST\_XXX}
|
||||
\helpref{constants}{wxcalendarctrl} and fills either {\it date} or
|
||||
{\it wd} pointer with the corresponding value depending on the hit test code.
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxCalendarDateAttr}}\label{wxcalendardateattr}
|
||||
|
||||
wxCalendarDateAttr is a custom attributes for a calendar date. The objects of
|
||||
this class are used with \helpref{wxCalendarCtrl}{wxcalendarctrl}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
No base class
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Constants}
|
||||
|
||||
Here are the possible kinds of borders which may be used to decorate a date:
|
||||
|
||||
{\small \begin{verbatim}
|
||||
enum wxCalendarDateBorder
|
||||
{
|
||||
wxCAL\_BORDER\_NONE, // no border (default)
|
||||
wxCAL\_BORDER\_SQUARE, // a rectangular border
|
||||
wxCAL\_BORDER\_ROUND // a round border
|
||||
}
|
||||
\end{verbatim}}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxCalendarCtrl}{wxcalendarctrl}
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::wxCalendarDateAttr}\label{wxcalendardateattrwxcalendardateattr}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxCalendarDateAttr}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxCalendarDateAttr}{\param{const wxColour\& }{colText}, \param{const wxColour\& }{colBack = wxNullColour}, \param{const wxColour\& }{colBorder = wxNullColour}, \param{const wxFont\& }{font = wxNullFont}, \param{wxCalendarDateBorder }{border = wxCAL\_BORDER\_NONE}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxCalendarDateAttr}{\param{wxCalendarDateBorder }{border}, \param{const wxColour\& }{colBorder = wxNullColour}}
|
||||
|
||||
The constructors.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::SetTextColour}\label{wxcalendardateattrsettextcolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetTextColour}{\param{const wxColour\& }{colText}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the text (foreground) colour to use.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::SetBackgroundColour}\label{wxcalendardateattrsetbackgroundcolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetBackgroundColour}{\param{const wxColour\& }{colBack}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the text background colour to use.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::SetBorderColour}\label{wxcalendardateattrsetbordercolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetBorderColour}{\param{const wxColour\& }{col}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the border colour to use.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::SetFont}\label{wxcalendardateattrsetfont}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetFont}{\param{const wxFont\& }{font}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the font to use.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::SetBorder}\label{wxcalendardateattrsetborder}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetBorder}{\param{wxCalendarDateBorder }{border}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the \helpref{border kind}{wxcalendardateattr}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::SetHoliday}\label{wxcalendardateattrsetholiday}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetHoliday}{\param{bool }{holiday}}
|
||||
|
||||
Display the date with this attribute as a holiday.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::HasTextColour}\label{wxcalendardateattrhastextcolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasTextColour}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this item has a non default text foreground colour.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::HasBackgroundColour}\label{wxcalendardateattrhasbackgroundcolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasBackgroundColour}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this attribute specifies a non default text background colour.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::HasBorderColour}\label{wxcalendardateattrhasbordercolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasBorderColour}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this attribute specifies a non default border colour.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::HasFont}\label{wxcalendardateattrhasfont}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasFont}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this attribute specifies a non default font.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::HasBorder}\label{wxcalendardateattrhasborder}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasBorder}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this attribute specifies a non default (i.e. any) border.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::IsHoliday}\label{wxcalendardateattrisholiday}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsHoliday}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if this attribute specifies that this item should be
|
||||
displayed as a holiday.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::GetTextColour}\label{wxcalendardateattrgettextcolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxColour\&}{GetTextColour}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the text colour to use for the item with this attribute.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::GetBackgroundColour}\label{wxcalendardateattrgetbackgroundcolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxColour\&}{GetBackgroundColour}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the background colour to use for the item with this attribute.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::GetBorderColour}\label{wxcalendardateattrgetbordercolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxColour\&}{GetBorderColour}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the border colour to use for the item with this attribute.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::GetFont}\label{wxcalendardateattrgetfont}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxFont\&}{GetFont}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the font to use for the item with this attribute.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::GetBorder}\label{wxcalendardateattrgetborder}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxCalendarDateBorder}{GetBorder}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the \helpref{border}{wxcalendardateattr} to use for the item with this attribute.
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxCalendarEvent}}\label{wxcalendarevent}
|
||||
|
||||
The wxCalendarEvent class is used together with
|
||||
\helpref{wxCalendarCtrl}{wxcalendarctrl}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxCalendarCtrl}{wxcalendarctrl}
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarEvent::GetDate}{wxcalendareventgetdate}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxDateTime&}{GetDate}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the date. This function may be called for all event types except
|
||||
{\tt EVT\_CALENDAR\_WEEKDAY\_CLICKED} one for which it doesn't make sense.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCalendarEvent::GetWeekDay}{wxcalendareventgetweekday}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxDateTime::WeekDay}{GetWeekDay}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the week day on which the user clicked in
|
||||
{\tt EVT\_CALENDAR\_WEEKDAY\_CLICKED} handler. It doesn't make sense to call
|
||||
this function in other handlers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
147
docs/latex/wx/caret.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
%% Name: caret.tex
|
||||
%% Purpose: wxCaret documentation
|
||||
%% Author: Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% Modified by:
|
||||
%% Created: 20.06.00
|
||||
%% RCS-ID: $Id$
|
||||
%% Copyright: (c) Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% License: wxWindows license
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxCaret}}\label{wxcaret}
|
||||
|
||||
A caret is a blinking cursor showing the position where the typed text will
|
||||
appear. The text controls usually have a caret but wxCaret class also allows
|
||||
to use a caret in other windows.
|
||||
|
||||
Currently, the caret appears as a rectangle of the given size. In the future,
|
||||
it will be possible to specify a bitmap to be used for the caret shape.
|
||||
|
||||
A caret is always associated with a window and the current caret can be
|
||||
retrieved using \helpref{wxWindow::GetCaret}{wxwindowgetcaret}. The same caret
|
||||
can't be reused in two different windows.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
No base class
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/caret.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Data structures}
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCaret::wxCaret}\label{wxcaretwxcaret}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxCaret}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Default constructor: you must use one of Create() functions later.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxCaret}{\param{wxWindow* }{window}, \param{int }{width}, \param{int }{height}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxCaret}{\param{wxWindowBase* }{window}, \param{const wxSize\& }{size}}
|
||||
|
||||
Create the caret of given (in pixels) width and height and associates it
|
||||
with the given window.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCaret::Create}\label{wxcaretcreate}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Create}{\param{wxWindowBase* }{window}, \param{int }{width}, \param{int }{height}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Create}{\param{wxWindowBase* }{window}, \param{const wxSize\& }{size}}
|
||||
|
||||
Create the caret of given (in pixels) width and height and associates it
|
||||
with the given window (same as constructor).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCaret::GetBlinkTime}\label{wxcaretgetblinktime}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{static int}{GetBlinkTime}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the blink time which is measured in milliseconds and is the time elapsed
|
||||
between 2 inversions of the caret (blink time of the caret is the same
|
||||
for all carets, so this functions is static).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCaret::GetPosition}\label{wxcaretgetposition}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{void}{GetPosition}{\param{int* }{x}, \param{int* }{y}}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxPoint}{GetPosition}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Get the caret position (in pixels).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCaret::GetSize}\label{wxcaretgetsize}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{void}{GetSize}{\param{int* }{width}, \param{int* }{height}}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxSize}{GetSize}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Get the caret size.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCaret::GetWindow}\label{wxcaretgetwindow}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxWindow*}{GetWindow}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Get the window the caret is associated with.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCaret::Hide}\label{wxcarethide}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Hide}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Same as \helpref{wxCaret::Show(FALSE)}{wxcaretshow}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCaret::IsOk}\label{wxcaretisok}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsOk}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the caret was created successfully.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCaret::IsVisible}\label{wxcaretisvisible}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsVisible}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the caret is visible and FALSE if it is permanently
|
||||
hidden (if it is is blinking and not shown currently but will be after the
|
||||
next blink, this method still returns TRUE).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCaret::Move}\label{wxcaretmove}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Move}{\param{int }{x}, \param{int }{y}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Move}{\param{const wxPoint\& }{pt}}
|
||||
|
||||
Move the caret to given position (in logical coordinates).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCaret::SetBlinkTime}\label{wxcaretsetblinktime}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{static void}{SetBlinkTime}{\param{int }{milliseconds}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the blink time for all the carets.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
Under Windows, this function will change the blink time for {\bf all} carets
|
||||
permanently (until the next time it is called), even for the carets in other
|
||||
applications.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{GetBlinkTime}{wxcaretgetblinktime}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCaret::SetSize}\label{wxcaretsetsize}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetSize}{\param{int }{width}, \param{int }{height}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetSize}{\param{const wxSize\& }{size}}
|
||||
|
||||
Changes the size of the caret.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCaret::Show}\label{wxcaretshow}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Show}{\param{bool }{show = TRUE}}
|
||||
|
||||
Shows or hides the caret. Notice that if the caret was hidden $N$ times, it
|
||||
must be shown $N$ times as well to reappear on the screen.
|
||||
|
@@ -17,6 +17,7 @@ Frames may contain windows, and dialog boxes may directly contain controls.
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxMDIParentFrame}{wxmdiparentframe}}{MDI parent frame}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxMDIChildFrame}{wxmdichildframe}}{MDI child frame}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxMiniFrame}{wxminiframe}}{A frame with a small title bar}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxWizard}{wxwizard}}{A wizard dialog.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxTabbedDialog}{wxtabbeddialog}}{Tabbed dialog
|
||||
(deprecated, use wxNotebook instead)}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
@@ -39,6 +40,8 @@ The following are a variety of classes that are derived from wxWindow.
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxPlotWindow}{wxplotwindow}}{A class to display data.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxSashWindow}{wxsashwindow}}{Window with four optional sashes that can be dragged}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxSashLayoutWindow}{wxsashlayoutwindow}}{Window that can be involved in an IDE-like layout arrangement}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxWizardPage}{wxwizardpage}}{A base class for the page in wizard dialog.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxWizardPageSimple}{wxwizardpagesimple}}{A page in wizard dialog.}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
{\large {\bf Common dialogs}}
|
||||
@@ -61,6 +64,7 @@ in an application.
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxPrintDialog}{wxprintdialog}}{Standard print dialog}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxPageSetupDialog}{wxpagesetupdialog}}{Standard page setup dialog}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxMessageDialog}{wxmessagedialog}}{Simple message box dialog}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxWizard}{wxwizard}}{A wizard dialog.}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
{\large {\bf Controls}}
|
||||
@@ -72,6 +76,7 @@ that are not static can have \helpref{validators}{wxvalidator} associated with t
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxControl}{wxcontrol}}{The base class for controls}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxButton}{wxbutton}}{Push button control, displaying text}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxBitmapButton}{wxbitmapbutton}}{Push button control, displaying a bitmap}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxCalendarCtrl}{wxcalendarctrl}}{Date picker control}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxCheckBox}{wxcheckbox}}{Checkbox control}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxCheckListBox}{wxchecklistbox}}{A listbox with a checkbox to the left of each item}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxChoice}{wxchoice}}{Choice control (a combobox without the editable area)}
|
||||
@@ -81,8 +86,8 @@ that are not static can have \helpref{validators}{wxvalidator} associated with t
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxListBox}{wxlistbox}}{A list of strings for single or multiple selection}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxListCtrl}{wxlistctrl}}{A control for displaying lists of strings and/or icons, plus a multicolumn report view}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxTabCtrl}{wxtabctrl}}{Manages several tabs}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxTextCtrl}{wxtextctrl}}{Single or multline text editing control}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxTreeCtrl}{wxtreectrl}}{Tree (hierachy) control}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxTextCtrl}{wxtextctrl}}{Single or multiline text editing control}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxTreeCtrl}{wxtreectrl}}{Tree (hierarchy) control}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxScrollBar}{wxscrollbar}}{Scrollbar control}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxSpinButton}{wxspinbutton}}{A spin or `up-down' control}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxSpinCtrl}{wxspinctrl}}{A spin control - i.e. spin button and text control}
|
||||
@@ -103,7 +108,7 @@ that are not static can have \helpref{validators}{wxvalidator} associated with t
|
||||
|
||||
{\large {\bf Window layout}}
|
||||
|
||||
There are two different systems for layouting windows (and dialogs in particluar).
|
||||
There are two different systems for layouting windows (and dialogs in particular).
|
||||
One is based upon so-called sizers and it requires less typing, thinking and calculating
|
||||
and will in almost all cases produce dialogs looking equally well on all platforms, the
|
||||
other is based on so-called constraints and allows for more detailed layouts.
|
||||
@@ -112,6 +117,8 @@ These are the classes relevant to the sizer-based layout.
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxSizer}{wxsizer}}{Abstract base class}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxGridSizer}{wxgridsizer}}{A sizer for laying out windows in a grid with all fields having the same size}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxFlexGridSizer}{wxflexgridsizer}}{A sizer for laying out windows in a flexible grid}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxBoxSizer}{wxboxsizer}}{A sizer for laying out windows in a row or column}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxStaticBoxSizer}{wxstaticboxsizer}}{Same as wxBoxSizer, but with surrounding static box}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxNotebookSizer}{wxnotebooksizer}}{Sizer to use with the wxNotebook control.}
|
||||
@@ -179,9 +186,11 @@ An event object contains information about a specific event. Event handlers
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxActivateEvent}{wxactivateevent}}{A window or application activation event}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxCalendarEvent}{wxcalendarevent}}{Used with \helpref{wxCalendarCtrl}{wxcalendarctrl}}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxCalculateLayoutEvent}{wxcalculatelayoutevent}}{Used to calculate window layout}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxCloseEvent}{wxcloseevent}}{A close window or end session event}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxCommandEvent}{wxcommandevent}}{An event from a variety of standard controls}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDialUpEvent}{wxdialupevent}}{Event send by \helpref{wxDialUpManager}{wxdialupmanager}}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDropFilesEvent}{wxdropfilesevent}}{A drop files event}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxEraseEvent}{wxeraseevent}}{An erase background event}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxEvent}{wxevent}}{The event base class}
|
||||
@@ -203,10 +212,12 @@ An event object contains information about a specific event. Event handlers
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxScrollWinEvent}{wxscrollwinevent}}{A scroll event from scrolled windows}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxSizeEvent}{wxsizeevent}}{A size event}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxSocketEvent}{wxsocketevent}}{A socket event}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxSpinEvent}{wxspinevent}}{An event from \helpref{wxSpinButton}{wxspinbutton}}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxSysColourChangedEvent}{wxsyscolourchangedevent}}{A system colour change event}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxTabEvent}{wxtabevent}}{A tab control event}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxTreeEvent}{wxtreeevent}}{A tree control event}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxUpdateUIEvent}{wxupdateuievent}}{A user interface update event}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxWizardEvent}{wxwizardevent}}{A wizard event}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
{\large {\bf Validators}}
|
||||
@@ -227,10 +238,12 @@ user input.
|
||||
These are the data structure classes supported by wxWindows.
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxCmdLineParser}{wxcmdlineparser}}{Command line parser class}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDate}{wxdate}}{A class for date manipulation (deprecated in favour of wxDateTime)}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDateSpan}{wxdatespan}}{A logical time interval.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDateTime}{wxdatetime}}{A class for date/time manipulations}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxExpr}{wxexpr}}{A class for flexible I/O}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxExprDatabase}{wxexprdatabase}}{A class for flexible I/O}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDate}{wxdate}}{A class for date manipulation (deprecated in favour of wxDateTime)}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDateTime}{wxdatetime}}{A class for date/time manipulations}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxHashTable}{wxhashtable}}{A simple hash table implementation}
|
||||
% \twocolitem{\helpref{wxHashTableLong}{wxhashtablelong}}{A wxHashTable version for storing long data}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxList}{wxlist}}{A simple linked list implementation}
|
||||
@@ -247,6 +260,7 @@ These are the data structure classes supported by wxWindows.
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxRealPoint}{wxrealpoint}}{Representation of a point using floating point numbers}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxSize}{wxsize}}{Representation of a size}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxTime}{wxtime}}{A class for time manipulation (deprecated in favour of wxDateTime)}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxTimeSpan}{wxtimespan}}{A time interval.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxVariant}{wxvariant}}{A class for storing arbitrary types that may change at run-time}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -288,7 +302,8 @@ classes, functions and macros.
|
||||
wxWindows provides its own classes for socket based networking.
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxIPV4address}{wxipv4address}}{Represents an Internet adress}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDialUpManager}{wxdialupmanager}}{Provides functions to check the status of network connection and to establish one}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxIPV4address}{wxipv4address}}{Represents an Internet address}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxSocketBase}{wxsocketbase}}{Represents a socket base object}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxSocketClient}{wxsocketclient}}{Represents a socket client}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxSocketServer}{wxsocketserver}}{Represents a socket server}
|
||||
@@ -326,7 +341,7 @@ housekeeping for a document-centric application.
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDocument}{wxdocument}}{Represents a document}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxView}{wxview}}{Represents a view}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDocTemplate}{wxdoctemplate}}{Manages the relationship between a document class and a veiw class}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDocTemplate}{wxdoctemplate}}{Manages the relationship between a document class and a view class}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDocManager}{wxdocmanager}}{Manages the documents and views in an application}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDocChildFrame}{wxdocchildframe}}{A child frame for showing a document view}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDocParentFrame}{wxdocparentframe}}{A parent frame to contain views}
|
||||
@@ -339,7 +354,7 @@ housekeeping for a document-centric application.
|
||||
\overview{Overview}{printingoverview}
|
||||
|
||||
A printing and previewing framework is implemented to
|
||||
make it relatively straighforward to provide document printing
|
||||
make it relatively straightforward to provide document printing
|
||||
facilities.
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
@@ -432,7 +447,7 @@ capabilities of the various platforms.
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxMutex}{wxmutex}}{Mutex class}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxMutexLocker}{wxmutexlocker}}{Mutex locker utility class}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxCriticalSection}{wxcriticalsection}}{Critical section class}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxCriticalSectionLocker}{wxcriticalsectionlocker}}{ritical section locker utility class}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxCriticalSectionLocker}{wxcriticalsectionlocker}}{Critical section locker utility class}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxCondition}{wxcondition}}{Condition class}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -467,7 +482,10 @@ used internally by the HTML classes.
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxApp}{wxapp}}{Application class}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxConfig}{wxconfigbase}}{Classes for configuration reading/writing}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxCaret}{wxcaret}}{A caret (cursor) object}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxCmdLineParser}{wxcmdlineparser}}{Command line parser class}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxConfig}{wxconfigbase}}{Classes for configuration reading/writing (using either INI files or registry)}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDllLoader}{wxdllloader}}{Class to work with shared libraries.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxHelpController}{wxhelpcontroller}}{Family of classes for controlling help windows}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxLayoutAlgorithm}{wxlayoutalgorithm}}{An alternative window layout facility}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxProcess}{wxprocess}}{Process class}
|
||||
@@ -479,20 +497,22 @@ used internally by the HTML classes.
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxAutomationObject}{wxautomationobject}}{OLE automation class}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxFontMapper}{wxfontmapper}}{Font mapping, finding suitable font for given encoding}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxEncodingConverter}{wxencodingconverter}}{Encoding conversions}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxCalendarDateAttr}{wxcalendardateattr}}{Used with \helpref{wxCalendarCtrl}{wxcalendarctrl}}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
{\large {\bf Database classes}}
|
||||
|
||||
\overview{Database classes overview}{odbcoverview}
|
||||
|
||||
wxWindows provides two alternative sets of classes for accessing Microsoft's ODBC (Open Database Connectivity)
|
||||
product. The new version by Remstar is documented in a separate manual.
|
||||
The older classes are as follows:
|
||||
wxWindows provides a set of classes for accessing Microsoft's ODBC (Open
|
||||
Database Connectivity) product, also available for Unix and Linux. The
|
||||
new version by Remstar is documented here:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDatabase}{wxdatabase}}{Database class}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxQueryCol}{wxquerycol}}{Class representing a column}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxQueryField}{wxqueryfield}}{Class representing a field}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxRecordSet}{wxrecordset}}{Class representing one or more record}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDb}{wxdb}}{Database class}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDbColFor}{wxdbcolfor}}{International formatting}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDbColInf}{wxdbcolinf}}{Information about a columns definition}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDbTable}{wxdbtable}}{Access to rows of data in a table}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDbTableInf}{wxdbtableinf}}{Information describing the table}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\helpref{wxDbInf}{wxdbinf}}{Database connection}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ class, so there is no need to create such objects explicitly in an application.
|
||||
\func{wxObject*}{CreateObject}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Creates an object of the appropriate kind. Returns NULL if the class has not been declared
|
||||
dynamically createable (typically, it's an abstract class).
|
||||
dynamically creatable (typically, it is an abstract class).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxClassInfo::FindClass}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -21,6 +21,7 @@
|
||||
\input strmbfrd.tex
|
||||
\input calclevt.tex
|
||||
\input calctrl.tex
|
||||
\input caret.tex
|
||||
\input checkbox.tex
|
||||
\input checklst.tex
|
||||
\input choice.tex
|
||||
@@ -28,6 +29,7 @@
|
||||
\input clientdc.tex
|
||||
\input clipbrd.tex
|
||||
\input closeevt.tex
|
||||
\input cmdlpars.tex
|
||||
\input colour.tex
|
||||
\input colordlg.tex
|
||||
\input combobox.tex
|
||||
@@ -40,6 +42,7 @@
|
||||
\input countstr.tex
|
||||
\input critsect.tex
|
||||
\input crtslock.tex
|
||||
\input csconv.tex
|
||||
\input custdobj.tex
|
||||
\input cursor.tex
|
||||
\input database.tex
|
||||
@@ -49,15 +52,20 @@
|
||||
\input dobjsmpl.tex
|
||||
\input datstrm.tex
|
||||
\input date.tex
|
||||
\input datespan.tex
|
||||
\input datetime.tex
|
||||
\input db.tex
|
||||
\input dc.tex
|
||||
\input ddeclint.tex
|
||||
\input ddeconn.tex
|
||||
\input ddeservr.tex
|
||||
\input debugcxt.tex
|
||||
\input dialog.tex
|
||||
\input dialevt.tex
|
||||
\input dialup.tex
|
||||
\input dir.tex
|
||||
\input dirdlg.tex
|
||||
\input dllload.tex
|
||||
\input docchfrm.tex
|
||||
\input docmanag.tex
|
||||
\input docmdich.tex
|
||||
@@ -84,6 +92,7 @@
|
||||
\input filesys.tex
|
||||
\input filesysh.tex
|
||||
\input filetype.tex
|
||||
\input flexsizr.tex
|
||||
\input fltinstr.tex
|
||||
\input fltoutst.tex
|
||||
\input focusevt.tex
|
||||
@@ -100,6 +109,7 @@
|
||||
\input glcanvas.tex
|
||||
\input valgen.tex
|
||||
\input grid.tex
|
||||
\input gridsizr.tex
|
||||
\input hash.tex
|
||||
\input helpinst.tex
|
||||
\input htcell.tex
|
||||
@@ -146,6 +156,10 @@
|
||||
\input log.tex
|
||||
\input longlong.tex
|
||||
\input mask.tex
|
||||
\input mbconv.tex
|
||||
\input mbcnvfil.tex
|
||||
\input mbcnvut7.tex
|
||||
\input mbcnvut8.tex
|
||||
\input mdi.tex
|
||||
\input memorydc.tex
|
||||
\input fs_mem.tex
|
||||
@@ -233,6 +247,7 @@
|
||||
\input strmsock.tex
|
||||
\input spinbutt.tex
|
||||
\input spinctrl.tex
|
||||
\input spinevt.tex
|
||||
\input splitevt.tex
|
||||
\input splitter.tex
|
||||
\input statbmp.tex
|
||||
@@ -264,6 +279,7 @@
|
||||
\input txtstrm.tex
|
||||
\input textdlg.tex
|
||||
\input txtdrptg.tex
|
||||
\input timespan.tex
|
||||
\input valtext.tex
|
||||
\input textfile.tex
|
||||
\input thread.tex
|
||||
@@ -271,6 +287,7 @@
|
||||
\input timer.tex
|
||||
\input tipprov.tex
|
||||
\input toolbar.tex
|
||||
\input tooltip.tex
|
||||
\input treectrl.tex
|
||||
\input treeevt.tex
|
||||
\input treelay.tex
|
||||
@@ -283,6 +300,9 @@
|
||||
\input window.tex
|
||||
\input windowdc.tex
|
||||
\input wnddisbl.tex
|
||||
\input wizard.tex
|
||||
\input wizevt.tex
|
||||
\input wizpage.tex
|
||||
\input zipstrm.tex
|
||||
\input strmzlib.tex
|
||||
\input function.tex
|
||||
|
@@ -36,7 +36,9 @@ which is generated by a wxListBox control.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TEXT(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TEXT\_UPDATED command,
|
||||
which is generated by a wxTextCtrl control.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TEXT\_ENTER(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TEXT\_ENTER command,
|
||||
which is generated by a wxTextCtrl control.}
|
||||
which is generated by a wxTextCtrl control. Note that you must use
|
||||
wxTE\_PROCESS\_ENTER flag when creating the control if you want it to generate
|
||||
such events.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_MENU(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_MENU\_SELECTED command,
|
||||
which is generated by a menu item.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_MENU\_RANGE(id1, id2, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_MENU\_RANGE command,
|
||||
@@ -117,16 +119,16 @@ Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCommandEvent::Checked}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Checked}{\void}
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Checked}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE or FALSE for a checkbox selection event.
|
||||
Deprecated, use \helpref{IsChecked}{wxcommandeventischecked} instead.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCommandEvent::GetClientData}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void*}{GetClientData}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns client data pointer for a listbox or choice selection event
|
||||
(not valid for a deselection). Beware, this is not implmented anywhere...
|
||||
(not valid for a deselection).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCommandEvent::GetExtraLong}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -154,6 +156,16 @@ a deselection).
|
||||
Returns item string for a listbox or choice selection event (not valid for
|
||||
a deselection).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCommandEvent::IsChecked}\label{wxcommandeventischecked}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsChecked}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
This method can be used with checkbox and menu events: for the checkboxes, the
|
||||
method returns {\tt TRUE} for a selection event and {\tt FALSE} for a
|
||||
deselection one. For the menu events, this method indicates if the menu item
|
||||
just has become checked or unchecked (and thus only makes sense for checkable
|
||||
menu items).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCommandEvent::IsSelection}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{IsSelection}{\void}
|
||||
|
451
docs/latex/wx/cmdlpars.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,451 @@
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
%% Name: cmdlpars.tex
|
||||
%% Purpose: wxCmdLineParser documentation
|
||||
%% Author: Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% Modified by:
|
||||
%% Created: 27.03.00
|
||||
%% RCS-ID: $Id$
|
||||
%% Copyright: (c) Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% License: wxWindows license
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxCmdLineParser}}\label{wxcmdlineparser}
|
||||
|
||||
wxCmdLineParser is a class for parsing command line.
|
||||
|
||||
It has the following features:
|
||||
\begin{enumerate}
|
||||
\item distinguishes options, switches and parameters; allows option grouping
|
||||
\item allows both short and long options
|
||||
\item automatically generates the usage message from the command line description
|
||||
\item does type checks on the options values (number, date, $\ldots$).
|
||||
\end{enumerate}
|
||||
|
||||
To use it you should follow these steps:
|
||||
\begin{enumerate}
|
||||
\item \helpref{construct}{wxcmdlineparserconstruction} an object of this class
|
||||
giving it the command line to parse and optionally its description or use
|
||||
{\tt AddXXX()} functions later
|
||||
\item call {\tt Parse()}
|
||||
\item use {\tt Found()} to retrieve the results
|
||||
\end{enumerate}
|
||||
|
||||
In the documentation below the following terminology is used:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{switch}{This is a boolean option which can be given or not, but
|
||||
which doesn't have any value. We use the word switch to distinguish such boolean
|
||||
options from more generic options like those described below. For example,
|
||||
{\tt -v} might be a switch meaning "enable verbose mode".}
|
||||
\twocolitem{option}{Option for us here is something which comes with a value 0
|
||||
unlike a switch. For example, {\tt -o:filename} might be an option which allows
|
||||
to specify the name of the output file.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{parameter}{This is a required program argument.}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
No base class
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/cmdline.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Constants}
|
||||
|
||||
The structure wxCmdLineEntryDesc is used to describe the one command
|
||||
line switch, option or parameter. An array of such structures should be passed
|
||||
to \helpref{SetDesc()}{wxcmdlineparsersetdesc}. Also, the meanings of parameters
|
||||
of the {\tt AddXXX()} functions are the same as of the corresponding fields in
|
||||
this structure:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
struct wxCmdLineEntryDesc
|
||||
{
|
||||
wxCmdLineEntryType kind;
|
||||
const wxChar *shortName;
|
||||
const wxChar *longName;
|
||||
const wxChar *description;
|
||||
wxCmdLineParamType type;
|
||||
int flags;
|
||||
};
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
The type of a command line entity is in the {\tt kind} field and may be one of
|
||||
the following constants:
|
||||
{\small \begin{verbatim}
|
||||
enum wxCmdLineEntryType
|
||||
{
|
||||
wxCMD\_LINE\_SWITCH,
|
||||
wxCMD\_LINE\_OPTION,
|
||||
wxCMD\_LINE\_PARAM,
|
||||
wxCMD\_LINE\_NONE // use this to terminate the list
|
||||
}
|
||||
\end{verbatim}}
|
||||
|
||||
The field {\tt shortName} is the usual, short, name of the switch or the option.
|
||||
{\tt longName} is the corresponding long name or NULL if the option has no long
|
||||
name. Both of these fields are unused for the parameters. Both the short and
|
||||
long option names can contain only letters, digits and the underscores.
|
||||
|
||||
{\tt description} is used by the \helpref{Usage()}{wxcmdlineparserusage} method
|
||||
to construct a help message explaining the syntax of the program.
|
||||
|
||||
The possible values of {\tt type} which specifies the type of the value accepted
|
||||
by an option or parameter are:
|
||||
{\small \begin{verbatim}
|
||||
enum wxCmdLineParamType
|
||||
{
|
||||
wxCMD\_LINE\_VAL\_STRING, // default
|
||||
wxCMD\_LINE\_VAL\_NUMBER,
|
||||
wxCMD\_LINE\_VAL\_DATE,
|
||||
wxCMD\_LINE\_VAL\_NONE
|
||||
}
|
||||
\end{verbatim}}
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, the {\tt flags} field is a combination of the following bit masks:
|
||||
{\small \begin{verbatim}
|
||||
enum
|
||||
{
|
||||
wxCMD\_LINE\_OPTION\_MANDATORY = 0x01, // this option must be given
|
||||
wxCMD\_LINE\_PARAM\_OPTIONAL = 0x02, // the parameter may be omitted
|
||||
wxCMD\_LINE\_PARAM\_MULTIPLE = 0x04, // the parameter may be repeated
|
||||
wxCMD\_LINE\_OPTION\_HELP = 0x08, // this option is a help request
|
||||
wxCMD\_LINE\_NEEDS\_SEPARATOR = 0x10, // must have sep before the value
|
||||
}
|
||||
\end{verbatim}}
|
||||
|
||||
Notice that by default (i.e. if flags are just $0$), options are optional (sic)
|
||||
and each call to \helpref{AddParam()}{wxcmdlineparseraddparam} allows one more
|
||||
parameter - this may be changed by giving non-default flags to it, i.e. use
|
||||
{\tt wxCMD\_LINE\_OPTION\_MANDATORY} to require that the option is given and
|
||||
{\tt wxCMD\_LINE\_PARAM\_OPTIONAL} to make a parameter optional. Also,
|
||||
{\tt wxCMD\_LINE\_PARAM\_MULTIPLE} may be specified if the programs accepts a
|
||||
variable number of parameters - but it only can be given for the last parameter
|
||||
in the command line description. If you use this flag, you will probably need to
|
||||
use \helpref{GetParamCount}{wxcmdlineparsergetparamcount} to retrieve the number
|
||||
of parameters effectively specified after calling
|
||||
\helpref{Parse}{wxcmdlineparserparse}.
|
||||
|
||||
The last flag {\tt wxCMD\_LINE\_NEEDS\_SEPARATOR} can be specified to require a
|
||||
separator (either a colon, an equal sign or white space) between the option
|
||||
name and its value. By default, no separator is required.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxApp::argc}{wxappargc} and \helpref{wxApp::argv}{wxappargv}\\
|
||||
console sample
|
||||
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%% Methods by group %%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Function groups}}}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{Construction}\label{wxcmdlineparserconstruction}
|
||||
|
||||
Before \helpref{Parse}{wxcmdlineparserparse} can be called, the command line
|
||||
parser object must have the command line to parse and also the rules saying
|
||||
which switches, options and parameters are valid - this is called command line
|
||||
description in what follows.
|
||||
|
||||
You have complete freedom of choice as to when specify the required information,
|
||||
the only restriction is that it must be done before calling
|
||||
\helpref{Parse}{wxcmdlineparserparse}.
|
||||
|
||||
To specify the command line to parse you may use either one of constructors
|
||||
accepting it (\helpref{wxCmdLineParser(argc, argv)}{wxcmdlineparserwxcmdlineparserargc} or
|
||||
\helpref{wxCmdLineParser}{wxcmdlineparserwxcmdlineparserdescargc} usually) or,
|
||||
if you use \helpref{the default constructor}{wxcmdlineparserwxcmdlineparserdef},
|
||||
you can do it later by calling
|
||||
\helpref{SetCmdLine}{wxcmdlineparsersetcmdlineargc}.
|
||||
|
||||
The same holds for command line description: it can be specified either in
|
||||
the constructor (\helpref{without command line}{wxcmdlineparserwxcmdlineparserdesc} or
|
||||
\helpref{together with it}{wxcmdlineparserwxcmdlineparserdescargc}) or
|
||||
constructed later using either \helpref{SetDesc}{wxcmdlineparsersetdesc} or
|
||||
combination of \helpref{AddSwitch}{wxcmdlineparseraddswitch},
|
||||
\helpref{AddOption}{wxcmdlineparseraddoption} and
|
||||
\helpref{AddParam}{wxcmdlineparseraddparam} methods.
|
||||
|
||||
Using constructors or \helpref{SetDesc}{wxcmdlineparsersetdesc} uses a (usually
|
||||
{\tt const static}) table containing the command line description. If you want
|
||||
to decide which options to acccept during the run-time, using one of the
|
||||
{\tt AddXXX()} functions above might be preferable.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{Customization}\label{wxcmdlineparsercustomization}
|
||||
|
||||
wxCmdLineParser has several global options which may be changed by the
|
||||
application. All of the functions described in this section should be called
|
||||
before \helpref{Parse}{wxcmdlineparserparse}.
|
||||
|
||||
First global option is the support for long (also known as GNU-style) options.
|
||||
The long options are the ones which start with two dashes ({\tt "--"}) and look
|
||||
like this: {\tt --verbose}, i.e. they generally are complete words and not some
|
||||
abbreviations of them. As long options are used by more and more applications,
|
||||
they are enabled by default, but may be disabled with
|
||||
\helpref{DisableLongOptions}{wxcmdlineparserdisablelongoptions}.
|
||||
|
||||
Another global option is the set of characters which may be used to start an
|
||||
option (otherwise, the word on the command line is assumed to be a parameter).
|
||||
Under Unix, {\tt '-'} is always used, but Windows has at least two common
|
||||
choices for this: {\tt '-'} and {\tt '/'}. Some programs also use {\tt '+'}.
|
||||
The default is to use what suits most the current platform, but may be changed
|
||||
with \helpref{SetSwitchChars}{wxcmdlineparsersetswitchchars} method.
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, \helpref{SetLogo}{wxcmdlineparsersetlogo} can be used to show some
|
||||
application-specific text before the explanation given by
|
||||
\helpref{Usage}{wxcmdlineparserusage} function.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{Parsing command line}\label{wxcmdlineparserparsing}
|
||||
|
||||
After the command line description was constructed and the desiredoptions were
|
||||
set, you can finally call \helpref{Parse}{wxcmdlineparserparse} method.
|
||||
It returns $0$ if the command line was correct and was parsed, $-1$ if the help
|
||||
option was specified (this is a separate case as, normally, the program will
|
||||
terminate after this) or a positive number if there was an error during the
|
||||
command line parsing.
|
||||
|
||||
In the latter case, the appropriate error message and usage information are
|
||||
logged by wxCmdLineParser itself using the standard wxWindows logging functions.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{Getting results}\label{wxcmdlineparsergettingresults}
|
||||
|
||||
After calling \helpref{Parse}{wxcmdlineparserparse} (and if it returned $0$),
|
||||
you may access the results of parsing using one of overloaded {\tt Found()}
|
||||
methods.
|
||||
|
||||
For a simple switch, you will simply call
|
||||
\helpref{Found}{wxcmdlineparserfoundswitch} to determine if the switch was given
|
||||
or not, for an option or a parameter, you will call a version of {\tt Found()}
|
||||
which also returns the associated value in the provided variable. All
|
||||
{\tt Found()} functions return TRUE if the switch or option were found in the
|
||||
command line or FALSE if they were not specified.
|
||||
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%% Methods in alphabetic order %%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
\helponly{\insertatlevel{2}{
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Members}
|
||||
|
||||
}}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::wxCmdLineParser}\label{wxcmdlineparserwxcmdlineparserdef}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxCmdLineParser}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Default constructor. You must use
|
||||
\helpref{SetCmdLine}{wxcmdlineparsersetcmdlineargc} or
|
||||
\helpref{SetCmdLinelater.}{wxcmdlineparsersetcmdlinestr} later.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::wxCmdLineParser}\label{wxcmdlineparserwxcmdlineparserargc}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxCmdLineParser}{\param{int }{argc}, \param{char** }{argv}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor specifies the command line to parse. This is the traditional
|
||||
(Unix) command line format. The parameters {\it argc} and {\it argv} have the
|
||||
same meaning as for {\tt main()} function.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::wxCmdLineParser}\label{wxcmdlineparserwxcmdlineparserstr}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxCmdLineParser}{\param{const wxString\& }{cmdline}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor specifies the command line to parse in Windows format. The parameter
|
||||
{\it cmdline} has the same meaning as the corresponding parameter of
|
||||
{\tt WinMain()}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::wxCmdLineParser}\label{wxcmdlineparserwxcmdlineparserdesc}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxCmdLineParser}{\param{const wxCmdLineEntryDesc* }{desc}}
|
||||
|
||||
Same as \helpref{wxCmdLineParser}{wxcmdlineparserwxcmdlineparserdef}, but also
|
||||
specifies the \helpref{command line description}{wxcmdlineparsersetdesc}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::wxCmdLineParser}\label{wxcmdlineparserwxcmdlineparserdescargc}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxCmdLineParser}{\param{const wxCmdLineEntryDesc* }{desc}, \param{int }{argc}, \param{char** }{argv}}
|
||||
|
||||
Same as \helpref{wxCmdLineParser}{wxcmdlineparserwxcmdlineparserargc}, but also
|
||||
specifies the \helpref{command line description}{wxcmdlineparsersetdesc}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::wxCmdLineParser}\label{wxcmdlineparserwxcmdlineparserdescstr}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxCmdLineParser}{\param{const wxCmdLineEntryDesc* }{desc}, \param{const wxString\& }{cmdline}}
|
||||
|
||||
Same as \helpref{wxCmdLineParser}{wxcmdlineparserwxcmdlineparserstr}, but also
|
||||
specifies the \helpref{command line description}{wxcmdlineparsersetdesc}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::SetCmdLine}\label{wxcmdlineparsersetcmdlineargc}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetCmdLine}{\param{int }{argc}, \param{char** }{argv}}
|
||||
|
||||
Set command line to parse after using one of the constructors which don't do it.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxCmdLineParser}{wxcmdlineparserwxcmdlineparserargc}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::SetCmdLine}\label{wxcmdlineparsersetcmdlinestr}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetCmdLine}{\param{const wxString\& }{cmdline}}
|
||||
|
||||
Set command line to parse after using one of the constructors which don't do it.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxCmdLineParser}{wxcmdlineparserwxcmdlineparserstr}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::\destruct{wxCmdLineParser}}\label{wxcmdlineparserdtor}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{\destruct{wxCmdLineParser}}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Frees resources allocated by the object.
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf NB:} destructor is not virtual, don't use this class polymorphically.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::SetSwitchChars}\label{wxcmdlineparsersetswitchchars}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetSwitchChars}{\param{const wxString\& }{switchChars}}
|
||||
|
||||
{\it switchChars} contains all characters with which an option or switch may
|
||||
start. Default is {\tt "-"} for Unix, {\tt "-/"} for Windows.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::EnableLongOptions}\label{wxcmdlineparserenablelongoptions}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{EnableLongOptions}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
|
||||
|
||||
Enable or disable support for the long options.
|
||||
|
||||
As long options are not (yet) POSIX-compliant, this option allows to disable
|
||||
them.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{Customization}{wxcmdlineparsercustomization}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::DisableLongOptions}\label{wxcmdlineparserdisablelongoptions}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{DisableLongOptions}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Ientical to \helpref{EnableLongOptions(FALSE)}{wxcmdlineparserenablelongoptions}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::SetLogo}\label{wxcmdlineparsersetlogo}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetLogo}{\param{const wxString\& }{logo}}
|
||||
|
||||
{\it logo} is some extra text which will be shown by
|
||||
\helpref{Usage}{wxcmdlineparserusage} method.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::SetDesc}\label{wxcmdlineparsersetdesc}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetDesc}{\param{const wxCmdLineEntryDesc* }{desc}}
|
||||
|
||||
Construct the command line description
|
||||
|
||||
Take the command line description from the wxCMD\_LINE\_NONE terminated table.
|
||||
|
||||
Example of usage:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
static const wxCmdLineEntryDesc cmdLineDesc[] =
|
||||
{
|
||||
{ wxCMD_LINE_SWITCH, "v", "verbose", "be verbose" },
|
||||
{ wxCMD_LINE_SWITCH, "q", "quiet", "be quiet" },
|
||||
|
||||
{ wxCMD_LINE_OPTION, "o", "output", "output file" },
|
||||
{ wxCMD_LINE_OPTION, "i", "input", "input dir" },
|
||||
{ wxCMD_LINE_OPTION, "s", "size", "output block size", wxCMD_LINE_VAL_NUMBER },
|
||||
{ wxCMD_LINE_OPTION, "d", "date", "output file date", wxCMD_LINE_VAL_DATE },
|
||||
|
||||
{ wxCMD_LINE_PARAM, NULL, NULL, "input file", wxCMD_LINE_VAL_STRING, wxCMD_LINE_PARAM_MULTIPLE },
|
||||
|
||||
{ wxCMD_LINE_NONE }
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
wxCmdLineParser parser;
|
||||
|
||||
parser.SetDesc(cmdLineDesc);
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::AddSwitch}\label{wxcmdlineparseraddswitch}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{AddSwitch}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{const wxString\& }{lng = wxEmptyString}, \param{const wxString\& }{desc = wxEmptyString}, \param{int }{flags = 0}}
|
||||
|
||||
Add a switch {\it name} with an optional long name {\it lng} (no long name if it
|
||||
is empty, which is default), description {\it desc} and flags {\it flags} to the
|
||||
command line description.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::AddOption}\label{wxcmdlineparseraddoption}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{AddOption}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{const wxString\& }{lng = wxEmptyString}, \param{const wxString\& }{desc = wxEmptyString}, \param{wxCmdLineParamType }{type = wxCMD\_LINE\_VAL\_STRING}, \param{int }{flags = 0}}
|
||||
|
||||
Add an option {\it name} with an optional long name {\it lng} (no long name if
|
||||
it is empty, which is default) taking a value of the given type (string by
|
||||
default) to the command line description.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::AddParam}\label{wxcmdlineparseraddparam}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{AddParam}{\param{const wxString\& }{desc = wxEmptyString}, \param{wxCmdLineParamType }{type = wxCMD\_LINE\_VAL\_STRING}, \param{int }{flags = 0}}
|
||||
|
||||
Add a parameter of the given {\it type} to the command line description.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::Parse}\label{wxcmdlineparserparse}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{int}{Parse}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Parse the command line, return $0$ if ok, $-1$ if {\tt "-h"} or {\tt "--help"}
|
||||
option was encountered and the help message was given or a positive value if a
|
||||
syntax error occured.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::Usage}\label{wxcmdlineparserusage}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Usage}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Give the standard usage message describing all program options. It will use the
|
||||
options and parameters descriptions specified earlier, so the resulting message
|
||||
will not be helpful to the user unless the descriptions were indeed specified.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{SetLogo}{wxcmdlineparsersetlogo}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::Found}\label{wxcmdlineparserfoundswitch}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Found}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the given switch was found, FALSE otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::Found}\label{wxcmdlineparserfoundstringoption}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Found}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{wxString* }{value}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if an option taking a string value was found and stores the
|
||||
value in the provided pointer (which should not be NULL).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::Found}\label{wxcmdlineparserfoundintoption}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Found}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{long* }{value}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if an option taking an integer value was found and stores
|
||||
the value in the provided pointer (which should not be NULL).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::Found}\label{wxcmdlineparserfounddateoption}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Found}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{wxDateTime* }{value}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if an option taking a date value was found and stores the
|
||||
value in the provided pointer (which should not be NULL).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::GetParamCount}\label{wxcmdlineparsergetparamcount}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{size\_t}{GetParamCount}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the number of parameters found. This function makes sense mostly if you
|
||||
had used {\tt wxCMD\_LINE\_PARAM\_MULTIPLE} flag.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::GetParam}\label{wxcmdlineparsergetparam}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxString}{GetParam}{\param{size\_t }{n = 0u}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the value of Nth parameter (as string only for now).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{GetParamCount}{wxcmdlineparsergetparamcount}
|
||||
|
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ This class represents the colour chooser dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxColourDialog::wxColourDialog}
|
||||
\membersection{wxColourDialog::wxColourDialog}\label{wxcolourdialogwxcolourdialog}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxColourDialog}{\param{wxWindow* }{parent}, \param{wxColourData* }{data = NULL}}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -36,6 +36,12 @@ data, which will be copied to the colour dialog's colour data.
|
||||
|
||||
Destructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxColourDialog::Create}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Create}{\param{wxWindow* }{parent}, \param{wxColourData* }{data = NULL}}
|
||||
|
||||
Same as \helpref{constructor}{wxcolourdialogwxcolourdialog}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxColourDialog::GetColourData}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxColourData\&}{GetColourData}{\void}
|
||||
|
@@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ The default colour is black.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxColourData::SetCustomColour}\label{wxcolourdatasetcustomcolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetColour}{\param{int}{ i}, \param{const wxColour\&}{ colour}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetCustomColour}{\param{int}{ i}, \param{const wxColour\&}{ colour}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the {\it i}th custom colour for the colour dialog. {\it i} should
|
||||
be an integer between 0 and 15.
|
||||
|
@@ -16,15 +16,16 @@ A combobox permits a single selection only. Combobox items are numbered from zer
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/combo.h>
|
||||
<wx/combobox.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Window styles}
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxCB\_SIMPLE}}{Creates a combobox with a permanently displayed list. Windows only. }
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxCB\_DROPDOWN}}{Creates a combobox with a drop-down list.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxCB\_READONLY}}{Creates a combo box consisting of a drop-down list and static text item
|
||||
displaying the current selection.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxCB\_READONLY}}{Same as wxCB\_DROPDOWN but only the
|
||||
strings specified as the combobox choices can be selected, it is impossible to
|
||||
select (even from a program) a string which is not in the choices list.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxCB\_SORT}}{Sorts the entries in the list alphabetically.}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -319,6 +320,9 @@ wxPython.}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the text for the combobox text field.
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf NB:} For a combobox with {\tt wxCB\_READONLY} style the string must be in
|
||||
the combobox choices list, otherwise the call to SetValue() is ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{text}{The text to set.}
|
||||
|
@@ -5,12 +5,15 @@ objects. They may be used in a multithreaded application to wait until the
|
||||
given condition becomes true which happens when the condition becomes signaled.
|
||||
|
||||
For example, if a worker thread is doing some long task and another thread has
|
||||
to wait until it's finished, the latter thread will wait on the condition
|
||||
to wait until it is finished, the latter thread will wait on the condition
|
||||
object and the worker thread will signal it on exit (this example is not
|
||||
perfect because in this particular case it would be much better to just
|
||||
\helpref{Wait()}{wxthreadwait} for the worker thread, but if there are several
|
||||
worker threads it already makes much more sense).
|
||||
|
||||
Once the thread(s) are signaled, the condition then resets to the not
|
||||
signaled state, ready to fire again.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
None.
|
||||
@@ -51,18 +54,16 @@ Signals the object.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCondition::Wait}\label{wxconditionwait}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Wait}{\param{wxMutex\&}{ mutex}}
|
||||
\func{void}{Wait}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Waits indefinitely.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Wait}{\param{wxMutex\&}{ mutex}, \param{unsigned long}{ sec}, \param{unsigned long}{ nsec}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{Wait}{\param{unsigned long}{ sec}, \param{unsigned long}{ nsec}}
|
||||
|
||||
Waits until a signal is raised or the timeout has elapsed.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{mutex}{wxMutex object.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{sec}{Timeout in seconds}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{nsec}{Timeout nanoseconds component (added to {\it sec}).}
|
||||
|
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
|
||||
\section{\class{wxConfigBase}}\label{wxconfigbase}
|
||||
|
||||
wxConfigBase class defines the basic interface of all config classes. It can
|
||||
not be used by itself (it's an abstract base class) and you'll always use one
|
||||
not be used by itself (it is an abstract base class) and you will always use one
|
||||
of its derivations: wxIniConfig, wxFileConfig, wxRegConfig or any other.
|
||||
|
||||
However, usually you don't even need to know the precise nature of the class
|
||||
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ support a file system-like hierarchy of keys (files) and groups (directories).
|
||||
As in the file system case, to specify a key in the config class you must use
|
||||
a path to it. Config classes also support the notion of the current group,
|
||||
which makes it possible to use the relative paths. To clarify all this, here
|
||||
is an example (it's only for the sake of demonstration, it doesn't do anything
|
||||
is an example (it is only for the sake of demonstration, it doesn't do anything
|
||||
sensible!):
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
@@ -139,11 +139,11 @@ sensible!):
|
||||
|
||||
wxASSERT( conf->Read("Subgroup/SubgroupEntry", 0l) == 3 );
|
||||
|
||||
// use absolute path: it's allowed, too
|
||||
// use absolute path: it is allowed, too
|
||||
wxASSERT( conf->Read("/RootEntry", 0l) == 1 );
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
{\it Warning}: it's probably a good idea to always restore the path to its
|
||||
{\it Warning}: it is probably a good idea to always restore the path to its
|
||||
old value on function exit:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
@@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ doesn't save and restore the path):
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, the path separator in wxConfigBase and derived classes is always '/',
|
||||
regardless of the platform (i.e. it's {\bf not} '$\backslash\backslash$' under Windows).
|
||||
regardless of the platform (i.e. it is {\bf not} '$\backslash\backslash$' under Windows).
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{SetPath}{wxconfigbasesetpath}\\
|
||||
\helpref{GetPath}{wxconfigbasegetpath}
|
||||
@@ -186,9 +186,9 @@ The functions in this section allow to enumerate all entries and groups in the
|
||||
config file. All functions here return FALSE when there are no more items.
|
||||
|
||||
You must pass the same index to GetNext and GetFirst (don't modify it).
|
||||
Please note that it's {\bf not} the index of the current item (you will have
|
||||
Please note that it is {\bf not} the index of the current item (you will have
|
||||
some great surprizes with wxRegConfig if you assume this) and you shouldn't
|
||||
even look at it: it's just a "cookie" which stores the state of the
|
||||
even look at it: it is just a "cookie" which stores the state of the
|
||||
enumeration. It can't be stored inside the class because it would prevent you
|
||||
from running several enumerations simultaneously, that's why you must pass it
|
||||
explicitly.
|
||||
@@ -241,10 +241,11 @@ actually enumerating them, but you will probably never need them.
|
||||
\helpref{Exists}{wxconfigbaseexists}\\
|
||||
\helpref{GetEntryType}{wxconfigbasegetentrytype}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{Miscellaneous accessors}
|
||||
\membersection{Miscellaneous functions}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{GetAppName}{wxconfigbasegetappname}\\
|
||||
\helpref{GetVendorName}{wxconfigbasegetvendorname}
|
||||
\helpref{GetVendorName}{wxconfigbasegetvendorname}\\
|
||||
\helpref{SetUmask}{wxfileconfigsetumask}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{Key access}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -321,7 +322,7 @@ would be to prefix the offending symbols with a backslash.
|
||||
The following functions control this option:
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{IsExpandingEnvVars}{wxconfigbaseisexpandingenvvars}\\
|
||||
\helpref{SetExpandingEnvVars}{wxconfigbasesetexpandingenvvars}\\
|
||||
\helpref{SetExpandEnvVars}{wxconfigbasesetexpandenvvars}\\
|
||||
\helpref{SetRecordDefaults}{wxconfigbasesetrecorddefaults}\\
|
||||
\helpref{IsRecordingDefaults}{wxconfigbaseisrecordingdefaults}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -407,8 +408,7 @@ for use by desinstallation routine.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::DeleteEntry}\label{wxconfigbasedeleteentry}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{DeleteEntry}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{bool}{
|
||||
bDeleteGroupIfEmpty = TRUE}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{DeleteEntry}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{bool}{ bDeleteGroupIfEmpty = TRUE}}
|
||||
|
||||
Deletes the specified entry and the group it belongs to if it was the last key
|
||||
in it and the second parameter is true.
|
||||
@@ -471,8 +471,7 @@ The result is an element of enum EntryType:
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::GetFirstGroup}\label{wxconfigbasegetfirstgroup}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetFirstGroup}{\param{wxString\& }{str}, \param{long\&}{
|
||||
index}}
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetFirstGroup}{\param{wxString\& }{str}, \param{long\&}{ index}}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the first group.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -482,8 +481,7 @@ the next call.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::GetFirstEntry}\label{wxconfigbasegetfirstentry}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetFirstEntry}{\param{wxString\& }{str}, \param{long\&}{
|
||||
index}}
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetFirstEntry}{\param{wxString\& }{str}, \param{long\&}{ index}}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the first entry.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -493,8 +491,7 @@ the next call.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::GetNextGroup}\label{wxconfigbasegetnextgroup}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetNextGroup}{\param{wxString\& }{str}, \param{long\&}{
|
||||
index}}
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetNextGroup}{\param{wxString\& }{str}, \param{long\&}{ index}}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the next group.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -504,8 +501,7 @@ the next call.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::GetNextEntry}\label{wxconfigbasegetnextentry}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetNextEntry}{\param{wxString\& }{str}, \param{long\&}{
|
||||
index}}
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetNextEntry}{\param{wxString\& }{str}, \param{long\&}{ index}}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the next entry.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -556,20 +552,18 @@ Returns TRUE if we are expanding environment variables in key values.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::IsRecordingDefaults}\label{wxconfigbaseisrecordingdefaults}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{IsRecordingDefaults}{\void} const
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsRecordingDefaults}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if we are writing defaults back to the config file.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::Read}\label{wxconfigbaseread}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{wxString*}{
|
||||
str}}
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{wxString*}{ str}}
|
||||
|
||||
Read a string from the key, returning TRUE if the value was read. If the key
|
||||
was not found, {\it str} is not changed.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{wxString*}{
|
||||
str}, \param{const wxString\& }{defaultVal}}
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{wxString*}{ str}, \param{const wxString\& }{defaultVal}}
|
||||
|
||||
Read a string from the key. The default value is returned if the key was not
|
||||
found.
|
||||
@@ -592,8 +586,7 @@ not found, {\it l} is not changed.
|
||||
Reads a long value, returning TRUE if the value was found. If the value was
|
||||
not found, {\it defaultVal} is used instead.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{long }{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{long}{
|
||||
defaultVal}}
|
||||
\constfunc{long }{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{long}{ defaultVal}}
|
||||
|
||||
Reads a long value from the key and returns it. {\it defaultVal} is returned
|
||||
if the key is not found.
|
||||
@@ -667,7 +660,7 @@ exists.
|
||||
Sets the config object as the current one, returns the pointer to the previous
|
||||
current object (both the parameter and returned value may be NULL)
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::SetExpandingEnvVars}\label{wxconfigbasesetexpandingenvvars}
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::SetExpandEnvVars}\label{wxconfigbasesetexpandenvvars}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetExpandEnvVars }{\param{bool }{bDoIt = TRUE}}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -677,8 +670,8 @@ Determine whether we wish to expand environment variables in key values.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetPath}{\param{const wxString\& }{strPath}}
|
||||
|
||||
Set current path: if the first character is '/', it's the absolute path,
|
||||
otherwise it's a relative path. '..' is supported. If the strPath doesn't
|
||||
Set current path: if the first character is '/', it is the absolute path,
|
||||
otherwise it is a relative path. '..' is supported. If the strPath doesn't
|
||||
exist it is created.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::SetRecordDefaults}\label{wxconfigbasesetrecorddefaults}
|
||||
@@ -691,6 +684,19 @@ If on (default is off) all default values are written back to the config file.
|
||||
This allows the user to see what config options may be changed and is probably
|
||||
useful only for wxFileConfig.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::SetUmask}\label{wxfileconfigsetumask}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetUmask}{\param{int }{mode}}
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf NB:} this function is not in the base wxConfigBase class but is only
|
||||
implemented in wxFileConfig. Moreover, this function is Unix-specific and
|
||||
doesn't do anything on other platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
SetUmask() allows to set the mode to be used for the config file creation.
|
||||
For example, to create a config file which is not readable by other users
|
||||
(useful if it stores some sensitive information, such as passwords), you
|
||||
should do {\tt SetUmask(0077)}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConfigBase::Write}\label{wxconfigbasewrite}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Write}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{const wxString\& }{
|
||||
@@ -714,7 +720,3 @@ implements the following methods:\par
|
||||
\end{twocollist}}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 231 B After Width: | Height: | Size: 996 B |
60
docs/latex/wx/csconv.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
|
||||
%
|
||||
% automatically generated by HelpGen from
|
||||
% ../include/wx/strconv.h at 25/Mar/00 10:20:56
|
||||
%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxCSConv}}\label{wxcsconv}
|
||||
|
||||
This class converts between any character sets and Unicode.
|
||||
It has one predefined instance, {\bf wxConvLocal}, for the
|
||||
default user character set.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxMBConv}{wxmbconv}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/strconv.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxMBConv}{wxmbconv},
|
||||
\helpref{wxEncodingConverter}{wxencodingconverter},
|
||||
\helpref{wxMBConv classes overview}{mbconvclasses}
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCSConv::wxCSConv}\label{wxcsconvwxcsconv}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxCSConv}{\param{const wxChar* }{charset}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor. Specify the name of the character set you want to convert
|
||||
from/to.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCSConv::\destruct{wxCSConv}}\label{wxcsconvdtor}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{\destruct{wxCSConv}}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Destructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCSConv::LoadNow}\label{wxcsconvloadnow}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{LoadNow}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
If the conversion tables needs to be loaded from disk, this method
|
||||
will do so. Otherwise, they will be loaded when any of the conversion
|
||||
methods are called.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCSConv::MB2WC}\label{wxcsconvmb2wc}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{size\_t}{MB2WC}{\param{wchar\_t* }{buf}, \param{const char* }{psz}, \param{size\_t }{n}}
|
||||
|
||||
Converts from the selected character set to Unicode. Returns the size of the destination buffer.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCSConv::WC2MB}\label{wxcsconvwc2mb}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{size\_t}{WC2MB}{\param{char* }{buf}, \param{const wchar\_t* }{psz}, \param{size\_t }{n}}
|
||||
|
||||
Converts from Unicode to the selected character set. Returns the size of the destination buffer.
|
||||
|
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ hotSpotY=0)}}{Constructs a cursor from a filename}
|
||||
Destroys the cursor. A cursor can be reused for more
|
||||
than one window, and does not get destroyed when the window is
|
||||
destroyed. wxWindows destroys all cursors on application exit, although
|
||||
it's best to clean them up explicitly.
|
||||
it is best to clean them up explicitly.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCursor::Ok}\label{wxcursorok}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -3,9 +3,6 @@
|
||||
Every database object represents an ODBC connection.
|
||||
The connection may be closed and reopened.
|
||||
|
||||
Note: this class is considered obsolete, replaced by the Remstar wxDB/wxTable classes
|
||||
(documented separately in Word and PDF format, as odbc.doc and odbc.pdf).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
|
||||
@@ -18,6 +15,12 @@ Note: this class is considered obsolete, replaced by the Remstar wxDB/wxTable cl
|
||||
|
||||
\overview{wxDatabase overview}{wxdatabaseoverview}, \helpref{wxRecordSet}{wxrecordset}
|
||||
|
||||
A much more robust and feature-rich set of ODBC classes is now
|
||||
available and recommended for use in place of the wxDatabase class.
|
||||
|
||||
See details of these classes in:
|
||||
\helpref{wxDB}{wxdb}, \helpref{wxDbTable}{wxdbtable}
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDatabase::wxDatabase}
|
||||
|
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
|
||||
%% Created: 03.11.99
|
||||
%% RCS-ID: $Id$
|
||||
%% Copyright: (c) Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% Licence: wxWindows licence
|
||||
%% License: wxWindows license
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxDataFormat}}\label{wxdataformat}
|
||||
|
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
|
||||
%% Created: 18.10.99
|
||||
%% RCS-ID: $Id$
|
||||
%% Copyright: (c) wxWindows team
|
||||
%% Licence: wxWindows licence
|
||||
%% License: wxWindows license
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxDataObject}}\label{wxdataobject}
|
||||
|
15
docs/latex/wx/datespan.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
%% Name: datespan.tex
|
||||
%% Purpose: wxDateSpan documentation
|
||||
%% Author: Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% Modified by:
|
||||
%% Created: 04.04.00
|
||||
%% RCS-ID: $Id$
|
||||
%% Copyright: (c) Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% License: wxWindows license
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxDateSpan}}\label{wxdatespan}
|
||||
|
||||
The documentation for this section has not yet been written.
|
||||
|
1677
docs/latex/wx/db.tex
Normal file
@@ -108,6 +108,18 @@ See \helpref{wxMemoryDC}{wxmemorydc} for typical usage.
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxMemoryDC}{wxmemorydc}, \helpref{wxBitmap}{wxbitmap}, \helpref{wxMask}{wxmask}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDC::CalcBoundingBox}\label{wxdccalcboundingbox}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{CalcBoundingBox}{\param{wxCoord }{x}, \param{wxCoord }{y}}
|
||||
|
||||
Adds the specified point to the bounding box which can be retrieved with
|
||||
\helpref{MinX}{wxdcminx}, \helpref{MaxX}{wxdcmaxx} and
|
||||
\helpref{MinY}{wxdcminy}, \helpref{MaxY}{wxdcmaxy} functions.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{ResetBoundingBox}{wxdcresetboundingbox}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDC::Clear}\label{wxdcclear}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Clear}{\void}
|
||||
@@ -201,8 +213,7 @@ filling the shape.
|
||||
\param{double}{ start}, \param{double}{ end}}
|
||||
|
||||
Draws an arc of an ellipse. The current pen is used for drawing the arc and
|
||||
the current brush is used for drawing the pie. This function is currently only available for
|
||||
X window and PostScript device contexts.
|
||||
the current brush is used for drawing the pie.
|
||||
|
||||
{\it x} and {\it y} specify the x and y coordinates of the upper-left corner of the rectangle that contains
|
||||
the ellipse.
|
||||
@@ -336,6 +347,11 @@ the string. See \helpref{wxDC::GetTextExtent}{wxdcgettextextent} for how
|
||||
to get the dimensions of a text string, which can be used to position the
|
||||
text more precisely.
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf NB:} under wxGTK the current
|
||||
\helpref{logical function}{wxdcgetlogicalfunction} is used by this function
|
||||
but it is ignored by wxMSW. Thus, you should avoid using logical functions
|
||||
with this function in portable programs.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDC::EndDoc}\label{wxdcenddoc}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{EndDoc}{\void}
|
||||
@@ -358,10 +374,10 @@ Ends a document page (only relevant when outputting to a printer).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDC::FloodFill}\label{wxdcfloodfill}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{FloodFill}{\param{wxCoord}{ x}, \param{wxCoord}{ y}, \param{wxColour *}{colour}, \param{int}{ style=wxFLOOD\_SURFACE}}
|
||||
\func{void}{FloodFill}{\param{wxCoord}{ x}, \param{wxCoord}{ y}, \param{const wxColour\&}{ colour}, \param{int}{ style=wxFLOOD\_SURFACE}}
|
||||
|
||||
Flood fills the device context starting from the given point, in the given colour,
|
||||
and using a style:
|
||||
Flood fills the device context starting from the given point, using
|
||||
the {\it current brush colour}, and using a style:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\item wxFLOOD\_SURFACE: the flooding occurs until a colour other than the given colour is encountered.
|
||||
@@ -374,12 +390,26 @@ and using a style:
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxBrush\&}{GetBackground}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxBrush\&}{GetBackground}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the brush used for painting the background (see \helpref{wxDC::SetBackground}{wxdcsetbackground}).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDC::GetBackgroundMode}\label{wxdcgetbackgroundmode}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{int}{GetBackgroundMode}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the current background mode: {\tt wxSOLID} or {\tt wxTRANSPARENT}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{SetBackgroundMode}{wxdcsetbackgroundmode}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDC::GetBrush}\label{wxdcgetbrush}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxBrush\&}{GetBrush}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxBrush\&}{GetBrush}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the current brush (see \helpref{wxDC::SetBrush}{wxdcsetbrush}).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDC::GetCharHeight}\label{wxdcgetcharheight}
|
||||
@@ -407,6 +437,8 @@ rectangle are returned as a tuple.}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxFont\&}{GetFont}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxFont\&}{GetFont}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the current font (see \helpref{wxDC::SetFont}{wxdcsetfont}).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDC::GetLogicalFunction}\label{wxdcgetlogicalfunction}
|
||||
@@ -432,6 +464,8 @@ See \helpref{wxDC::SetOptimization}{wxsetoptimization} for details.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxPen\&}{GetPen}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxPen\&}{GetPen}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the current pen (see \helpref{wxDC::SetPen}{wxdcsetpen}).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDC::GetPixel}\label{wxdcgetpixel}
|
||||
@@ -478,6 +512,8 @@ implements the following methods:\par
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxColour\&}{GetTextBackground}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxColour\&}{GetTextBackground}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the current text background colour (see \helpref{wxDC::SetTextBackground}{wxdcsettextbackground}).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDC::GetTextExtent}\label{wxdcgettextextent}
|
||||
@@ -511,6 +547,8 @@ See also \helpref{wxFont}{wxfont}, \helpref{wxDC::SetFont}{wxdcsetfont}.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxColour\&}{GetTextForeground}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxColour\&}{GetTextForeground}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the current text foreground colour (see \helpref{wxDC::SetTextForeground}{wxdcsettextforeground}).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -579,6 +617,17 @@ Gets the minimum vertical extent used in drawing commands so far.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the DC is ok to use.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDC::ResetBoundingBox}\label{wxdcresetboundingbox}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{ResetBoundingBox}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Resets the bounding box: after a call to this function, the bounding box
|
||||
doesn't contain anything.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{CalcBoundingBox}{wxdccalcboundingbox}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDC::SetDeviceOrigin}\label{wxdcsetdeviceorigin}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetDeviceOrigin}{\param{wxCoord}{ x}, \param{wxCoord}{ y}}
|
||||
|
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ To create a client which can communicate with a suitable server,
|
||||
you need to derive a class from wxDDEConnection and another from wxDDEClient.
|
||||
The custom wxDDEConnection class will intercept communications in
|
||||
a `conversation' with a server, and the custom wxDDEServer is required
|
||||
so that a user-overriden \helpref{wxDDEClient::OnMakeConnection}{wxddeclientonmakeconnection} member can return
|
||||
so that a user-overridden \helpref{wxDDEClient::OnMakeConnection}{wxddeclientonmakeconnection} member can return
|
||||
a wxDDEConnection of the required class, when a connection is made.
|
||||
|
||||
This DDE-based implementation is
|
||||
|
48
docs/latex/wx/dialevt.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
%% Name: dialevt.tex
|
||||
%% Purpose: wxDialUpEvent documentation
|
||||
%% Author: Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% Modified by:
|
||||
%% Created: 08.04.00
|
||||
%% RCS-ID: $Id$
|
||||
%% Copyright: (c) Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% License: wxWindows license
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxDialUpEvent}}\label{wxdialupevent}
|
||||
|
||||
This is the event class for the dialup events sent by
|
||||
\helpref{wxDialUpManager}{wxdialupmanager}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxEvent}{wxevent}\\
|
||||
\helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/dialup.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpEvent::wxDialUpEvent}\label{wxdialupeventwxdialupevent}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxDialUpEvent}{\param{bool }{isConnected}, \param{bool }{isOwnEvent}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor is only used by \helpref{wxDialUpManager}{wxdialupmanager}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpEvent::IsConnectedEvent}\label{wxdialupeventisconnectedevent}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsConnectedEvent}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Is this a {\tt CONNECTED} or {\tt DISCONNECTED} event? In other words, does it
|
||||
notify about transition from offline to online state or vice versa?
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpEvent::IsOwnEvent}\label{wxdialupeventisownevent}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsOwnEvent}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Does this event come from wxDialUpManager::Dial() or from some extrenal
|
||||
process (i.e. does it result from our own attempt to establish the
|
||||
connection)?
|
||||
|
@@ -22,7 +22,10 @@ like a frame in that program flow continues, and input on other windows is still
|
||||
You specify the type of dialog with the {\bf wxDIALOG\_MODAL} and {\bf wxDIALOG\_MODELESS} window
|
||||
styles.
|
||||
|
||||
A dialog may be loaded from a wxWindows resource file (extension {\tt wxr}).
|
||||
A dialog may be loaded from a wxWindows resource file (extension {\tt wxr}), which may itself
|
||||
be created by Dialog Editor. For details,
|
||||
see \helpref{The wxWindows resource system}{resourceformats}, \helpref{wxWindows resource functions}{resourcefuncs} and
|
||||
the resource sample.
|
||||
|
||||
An application can define an \helpref{OnCloseWindow}{wxwindowonclosewindow} handler for the
|
||||
dialog to respond to system close events.
|
||||
@@ -31,9 +34,10 @@ dialog to respond to system close events.
|
||||
|
||||
\twocolwidtha{5cm}
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxCAPTION}}{Puts a caption on the dialog box (Motif only).}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxDIALOG\_MODAL}}{Specifies that the dialog box will be modal.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxCAPTION}}{Puts a caption on the dialog box.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxDEFAULT\_DIALOG\_STYLE}}{Equivalent to a combination of wxCAPTION, wxSYSTEM\_MENU and wxTHICK\_FRAME}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxRESIZE\_BORDER}}{Display a resizeable frame around the window (Unix only).}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxRESIZE\_BORDER}}{Display a resizeable frame around the window.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxSYSTEM\_MENU}}{Display a system menu.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxTHICK\_FRAME}}{Display a thick frame around the window.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxSTAY\_ON\_TOP}}{The dialog stays on top of all other windows (Windows only).}
|
||||
@@ -279,6 +283,9 @@ propagate the notification to child windows and controls.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetModal}{\param{const bool}{ flag}}
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf NB:} This function is deprecated and doesn't work for all ports, just use
|
||||
\helpref{ShowModal}{wxdialogshowmodal} to show a modal dialog instead.
|
||||
|
||||
Allows the programmer to specify whether the dialog box is modal (wxDialog::Show blocks control
|
||||
until the dialog is hidden) or modeless (control returns immediately).
|
||||
|
||||
|
215
docs/latex/wx/dialup.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,215 @@
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
%% Name: dialup.tex
|
||||
%% Purpose: wxDialUpManager documentation
|
||||
%% Author: Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% Modified by:
|
||||
%% Created: 08.04.00
|
||||
%% RCS-ID: $Id$
|
||||
%% Copyright: (c) Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% License: wxWindows license
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxDialUpManager}}\label{wxdialupmanager}
|
||||
|
||||
This class encapsulates functions dealing with veryfying the connection status
|
||||
of the workstation (connected to the Internet via a direct connection,
|
||||
connected through a modem or not connected at all) and to establish this
|
||||
connection if possible/required (i.e. in the case of the modem).
|
||||
|
||||
The program may also wish to be notified about the change in the connection
|
||||
status (for example, to perform some action when the user connects to the
|
||||
network the next time or, on the contrary, to stop receiving data from the net
|
||||
when the user hangs up the modem). For this, you need to use one of the event
|
||||
macros described below.
|
||||
|
||||
This class is different from other wxWindows classes in that there is at most
|
||||
one instance of this class in the program accessed via
|
||||
\helpref{wxDialUpManager::Create()}{wxdialupmanagercreate} and you can't
|
||||
create the objects of this class directly.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
No base class
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/dialup.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Event table macros}
|
||||
|
||||
To be notified about the change in the network connection status, use these
|
||||
event handler macros to direct input to member functions that take a
|
||||
\helpref{wxDialUpEvent}{wxdialupevent} argument.
|
||||
|
||||
\twocolwidtha{7cm}
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_DIALUP\_CONNECTED(func)}}{A connection with the network was established.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_DIALUP\_DISCONNECTED(func)}}{The connection with the network was lost.}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}%
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{dialup sample}{sampledialup}\\
|
||||
\helpref{wxDialUpEvent}{wxdialupevent}
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::Create}\label{wxdialupmanagercreate}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxDialUpManager*}{Create}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
This function should create and return the object of the platform-specific
|
||||
class derived from wxDialUpManager. You should delete the pointer when you are
|
||||
done with it.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::IsOk}\label{wxdialupmanagerisok}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsOk}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the dialup manager was initialized correctly. If this
|
||||
function returns {\tt FALSE}, no other functions will work neither, so it is a
|
||||
good idea to call this function and check its result before calling any other
|
||||
wxDialUpManager methods
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::\destruct{wxDialUpManager}}\label{wxdialupmanagerdtor}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{\destruct{wxDialUpManager}}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Destructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::GetISPNames}\label{wxdialupmanagergetispnames}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{size\_t}{GetISPNames}{\param{wxArrayString\& }{names}}
|
||||
|
||||
This function is only implemented under Windows.
|
||||
|
||||
Fills the array with the names of all possible values for the first
|
||||
parameter to \helpref{Dial()}{wxdialupmanagerdial} on this machine and returns
|
||||
their number (may be $0$).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::Dial}\label{wxdialupmanagerdial}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Dial}{\param{const wxString\& }{nameOfISP = wxEmptyString}, \param{const wxString\& }{username = wxEmptyString}, \param{const wxString\& }{password = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{async = TRUE}}
|
||||
|
||||
Dial the given ISP, use {\it username} and {\it password} to authentificate.
|
||||
|
||||
The parameters are only used under Windows currently, for Unix you should use
|
||||
\helpref{SetConnectCommand}{wxdialupmanagersetconnectcommand} to customize this
|
||||
functions behaviour.
|
||||
|
||||
If no {\it nameOfISP} is given, the function will select the default one
|
||||
(proposing the user to choose among all connections defined on this machine)
|
||||
and if no username and/or password are given, the function will try to do
|
||||
without them, but will ask the user if really needed.
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it async} parameter is {\tt FALSE}, the function waits until the end of dialing
|
||||
and returns {\tt TRUE} upon successful completion.
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it async} is {\tt TRUE}, the function only initiates the connection and
|
||||
returns immediately - the result is reported via events (an event is sent
|
||||
anyhow, but if dialing failed it will be a DISCONNECTED one).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::IsDialing}\label{wxdialupmanagerisdialing}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsDialing}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if (async) dialing is in progress.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{Dial}{wxdialupmanagerdial}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::CancelDialing}\label{wxdialupmanagercanceldialing}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{CancelDialing}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Cancel dialing the number initiated with \helpref{Dial}{wxdialupmanagerdial}
|
||||
with async parameter equal to {\tt TRUE}.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that this won't result in DISCONNECTED event being sent.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{IsDialing}{wxdialupmanagerisdialing}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::HangUp}\label{wxdialupmanagerhangup}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{HangUp}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Hang up the currently active dial up connection.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::IsAlwaysOnline}\label{wxdialupmanagerisalwaysonline}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsAlwaysOnline}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the computer has a permanent network connection (i.e. is
|
||||
on a LAN) and so there is no need to use Dial() function to go online.
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf NB:} this functions tries to guess the result and it is not always
|
||||
guaranteed to be correct, so it is better to ask user for
|
||||
confirmation or give him a possibility to override it.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::IsOnline}\label{wxdialupmanagerisonline}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsOnline}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt TRUE} if the computer is connected to the network: under Windows,
|
||||
this just means that a RAS connection exists, under Unix we check that
|
||||
the "well-known host" (as specified by
|
||||
\helpref{SetWellKnownHost}{wxdialupmanagersetwellknownhost}) is reachable.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::SetOnlineStatus}\label{wxdialupmanagersetonlinestatus}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetOnlineStatus}{\param{bool }{isOnline = TRUE}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sometimes the built-in logic for determining the online status may fail,
|
||||
so, in general, the user should be allowed to override it. This function
|
||||
allows to forcefully set the online status - whatever our internal
|
||||
algorithm may think about it.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{IsOnline}{wxdialupmanagerisonline}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::EnableAutoCheckOnlineStatus}\label{wxdialupmanagerenableautocheckonlinestatus}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{EnableAutoCheckOnlineStatus}{\param{size\_t }{nSeconds = 60}}
|
||||
|
||||
Enable automatical checks for the connection status and sending of
|
||||
{\tt wxEVT\_DIALUP\_CONNECTED/wxEVT\_DIALUP\_DISCONNECTED} events. The interval
|
||||
parameter is only for Unix where we do the check manually and specifies how
|
||||
often should we repeat the check (each minute by default). Under Windows, the
|
||||
notification about the change of connection status is sent by the system and so
|
||||
we don't do any polling and this parameter is ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns {\tt FALSE} if couldn't set up automatic check for online status.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::DisableAutoCheckOnlineStatus}\label{wxdialupmanagerdisableautocheckonlinestatus}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{DisableAutoCheckOnlineStatus}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Disable automatic check for connection status change - notice that the
|
||||
{\tt wxEVT\_DIALUP\_XXX} events won't be sent any more neither.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::SetWellKnownHost}\label{wxdialupmanagersetwellknownhost}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetWellKnownHost}{\param{const wxString\& }{hostname}, \param{int }{portno = 80}}
|
||||
|
||||
This method is for Unix only.
|
||||
|
||||
Under Unix, the value of well-known host is used to check whether we're
|
||||
connected to the internet. It is unused under Windows, but this function
|
||||
is always safe to call. The default value is {\tt www.yahoo.com:80}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::SetConnectCommand}\label{wxdialupmanagersetconnectcommand}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{SetConnectCommand}{\param{const wxString\& }{commandDial = wxT("/usr/bin/pon")}, \param{const wxString\& }{commandHangup = wxT("/usr/bin/poff")}}
|
||||
|
||||
This method is for Unix only.
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the commands to start up the network and to hang up again.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{Dial}{wxdialupmanagerdial}
|
||||
|
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ class is not meant to be used polymorphically.
|
||||
\func{bool}{Open}{\param{const wxString\& }{dir}}
|
||||
|
||||
Open the directory for enumerating, returns TRUE on success or FALSE if an
|
||||
error occured.
|
||||
error occurred.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDir::IsOpened}\label{wxdirisopened}
|
||||
|
||||
|
145
docs/latex/wx/dllload.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
%% Name: dllload.tex
|
||||
%% Purpose: wxDllLoader documentation
|
||||
%% Author: Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% Modified by:
|
||||
%% Created: 02.04.00
|
||||
%% RCS-ID: $Id$
|
||||
%% Copyright: (c) Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% License: wxWindows license
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxDllLoader}}\label{wxdllloader}
|
||||
|
||||
wxDllLoader is a class providing an interface similar to Unix's {\tt
|
||||
dlopen()}. It is used by the wxLibrary framework and manages the actual
|
||||
loading of shared libraries and the resolving of symbols in them. There are no
|
||||
instances of this class, it simply serves as a namespace for its static member
|
||||
functions.
|
||||
|
||||
The terms {\it DLL} and {\it shared library/object} will both be used in the
|
||||
documentation to refer to the same thing: a {\tt .dll} file under Windows or
|
||||
{\tt .so} or {\tt .sl} one under Unix.
|
||||
|
||||
Example of using this class to dynamically load {\tt strlen()} function:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
#if defined(__WXMSW__)
|
||||
static const wxChar *LIB_NAME = _T("kernel32");
|
||||
static const wxChar *FUNC_NAME = _T("lstrlenA");
|
||||
#elif defined(__UNIX__)
|
||||
static const wxChar *LIB_NAME = _T("/lib/libc-2.0.7.so");
|
||||
static const wxChar *FUNC_NAME = _T("strlen");
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
wxDllType dllHandle = wxDllLoader::LoadLibrary(LIB_NAME);
|
||||
if ( !dllHandle )
|
||||
{
|
||||
... error ...
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
typedef int (*strlenType)(char *);
|
||||
strlenType pfnStrlen = (strlenType)wxDllLoader::GetSymbol(dllHandle, FUNC_NAME);
|
||||
if ( !pfnStrlen )
|
||||
{
|
||||
... error ...
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( pfnStrlen("foo") != 3 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
... error ...
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
... ok! ...
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
wxDllLoader::UnloadLibrary(dllHandle);
|
||||
}
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
No base class
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/dynlib.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Data structures}
|
||||
|
||||
This header defines a platfrom-dependent {\tt wxDllType} typedef which stores
|
||||
a handle to a loaded DLLs on the given platform.
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDllLoader::GetDllExt}\label{wxdllloadergetdllext}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{static wxString}{GetDllExt}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the string containing the usual extension for shared libraries for the
|
||||
given systems (including the leading dot if not empty).
|
||||
|
||||
For example, this function will return {\tt ".dll"} under Windows or (usually)
|
||||
{\tt ".so"} under Unix.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDllLoader::GetProgramHandle}\label{wxdllloadergetprogramhandle}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxDllType}{GetProgramHandle}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
This function returns a valid handle for the main program itself. Notice that
|
||||
the {\tt NULL} return value is valid for some systems (i.e. doesn't mean that
|
||||
the function failed).
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf NB:} This function is Unix specific. It will always fail under Windows
|
||||
or OS/2.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDllLoader::GetSymbol}\label{wxdllloadergetsymbol}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void *}{GetSymbol}{\param{wxDllType }{dllHandle}, \param{const wxString\& }{name}}
|
||||
|
||||
This function resolves a symbol in a loaded DLL, such as a variable or
|
||||
function name.
|
||||
|
||||
Returned value will be {\tt NULL} if the symbol was not found in the DLL or if
|
||||
an error occured.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{dllHandle}{Valid handle previously returned by
|
||||
\helpref{LoadLibrary}{wxdllloaderloadlibrary}}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{name}{Name of the symbol.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDllLoader::LoadLibrary}\label{wxdllloaderloadlibrary}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxDllType}{LoadLibrary}{\param{const wxString \& }{libname}, \param{bool* }{success = NULL}}
|
||||
|
||||
This function loads a shared library into memory, with {\it libname} being the
|
||||
name of the library: it may be either the full name including path and
|
||||
(platform-dependent) extenesion, just the basename (no path and no extension)
|
||||
or a basename with extentsion. In the last two cases, the library will be
|
||||
searched in all standard locations.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a handle to the loaded DLL. Use {\it success} parameter to test if it
|
||||
is valid. If the handle is valid, the library must be unloaded later with
|
||||
\helpref{UnloadLibrary}{wxdllloaderunloadlibrary}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{libname}{Name of the shared object to load.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{success}{May point to a bool variable which will be set to TRUE or
|
||||
FALSE; may also be {\tt NULL}.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDllLoader::UnloadLibrary}\label{wxdllloaderunloadlibrary}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{UnloadLibrary}{\param{wxDllType }{dllhandle}}
|
||||
|
||||
This function unloads the shared library. The handle {\it dllhandle} must have
|
||||
been returned by \helpref{LoadLibrary}{wxdllloaderloadlibrary} previously.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
|
||||
%% Created: 02.11.99
|
||||
%% RCS-ID: $Id$
|
||||
%% Copyright: (c) Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% Licence: wxWindows licence
|
||||
%% License: wxWindows license
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxDataObjectComposite}}\label{wxdataobjectcomposite}
|
||||
|
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
|
||||
%% Created: 02.11.99
|
||||
%% RCS-ID: $Id$
|
||||
%% Copyright: (c) Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% Licence: wxWindows licence
|
||||
%% License: wxWindows license
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxDataObjectSimple}}\label{wxdataobjectsimple}
|
||||
|
@@ -336,10 +336,12 @@ framework.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDocument::SetFilename}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetFilename}{\param{const wxString\& }{filename}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetFilename}{\param{const wxString\& }{filename}, \param{bool}{ notifyViews = FALSE}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the filename for this document. Usually called by the framework.
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it notifyViews} is TRUE, wxView::OnChangeFilename is called for all views.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDocument::SetTitle}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetTitle}{\param{const wxString\& }{title}}
|
||||
|
@@ -7,6 +7,9 @@ On Windows, the WIN32 API is used to do achieve smooth dragging. On other platfo
|
||||
wxGenericDragImage is used. Applications may also prefer to use
|
||||
wxGenericDragImage on Windows, too.
|
||||
|
||||
\pythonnote{wxPython uses wxGenericDragImage on all platforms, but
|
||||
uses the wxDragImage name.}
|
||||
|
||||
To use this class, when you wish to start dragging an image, create a wxDragImage
|
||||
object and store it somewhere you can access it as the drag progresses.
|
||||
Call BeginDrag to start, and EndDrag to stop the drag. To move the image,
|
||||
@@ -19,6 +22,10 @@ either across the whole screen, or just restricted to one area
|
||||
of the screen to save resources. If you want the user to drag between
|
||||
two windows, then you will need to use full-screen dragging.
|
||||
|
||||
If you wish to draw the image yourself, use wxGenericDragImage and
|
||||
override \helpref{wxDragImage::DoDrawImage}{wxdragimagedodrawimage} and
|
||||
\helpref{wxDragImage::GetImageRect}{wxdragimagegetimagerect}.
|
||||
|
||||
Please see {\tt samples/dragimag} for an example.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
@@ -48,19 +55,34 @@ Constructs a drag image from a bitmap and optional cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
Constructs a drag image from an icon and optional cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
\pythonnote{This constructor is called wxDragIcon in wxPython.}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxDragImage}{\param{const wxString\& }{text}, \param{const wxCursor\& }{cursor = wxNullCursor},
|
||||
\param{const wxPoint& }{hotspot = wxPoint(0, 0)}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructs a drag image from a text string and optional cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
\pythonnote{This constructor is called wxDragString in wxPython.}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxDragImage}{\param{const wxTreeCtrl\& }{treeCtrl}, \param{wxTreeItemId\& }{id}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructs a drag image from the text in the given tree control item, and optional cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
\pythonnote{This constructor is called wxDragTreeItem in wxPython.}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxDragImage}{\param{const wxListCtrl\& }{treeCtrl}, \param{long }{id}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructs a drag image from the text in the given tree control item, and optional cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
\pythonnote{This constructor is called wxDragListItem in wxPython.}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxDragImage}{\param{const wxCursor\& }{cursor = wxNullCursor},
|
||||
\param{const wxPoint& }{hotspot = wxPoint(0, 0)}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructs a drag image an optional cursor. This constructor is only available for
|
||||
wxGenericDragImage, and can be used when the application
|
||||
supplies \helpref{wxDragImage::DoDrawImage}{wxdragimagedodrawimage} and \helpref{wxDragImage::GetImageRect}{wxdragimagegetimagerect}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{image}{Icon or bitmap to be used as the drag image. The bitmap can
|
||||
@@ -117,6 +139,16 @@ bounds the dragging operation. Specifying this can make the operation more effic
|
||||
by cutting down on the area under consideration, and it can also make a visual difference
|
||||
since the drag is clipped to this area.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDragImage::DoDrawImage}\label{wxdragimagedodrawimage}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual bool}{DoDrawImage}{\param{wxDC\&}{ dc}, \param{const wxPoint\&}{ pos}}
|
||||
|
||||
Draws the image on the device context with top-left corner at the given position.
|
||||
|
||||
This function is only available with wxGenericDragImage, to allow applications to
|
||||
draw their own image instead of using an actual bitmap. If you override this function,
|
||||
you must also override \helpref{wxDragImage::GetImageRect}{wxdragimagegetimagerect}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDragImage::EndDrag}\label{wxdragimageenddrag}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{EndDrag}{\void}
|
||||
@@ -125,6 +157,16 @@ Call this when the drag has finished.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that this call automatically calls ReleaseMouse.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDragImage::GetImageRect}\label{wxdragimagegetimagerect}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{virtual wxRect}{GetImageRect}{\param{const wxPoint\&}{ pos}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the rectangle enclosing the image, assuming that the image is drawn with its
|
||||
top-left corner at the given point.
|
||||
|
||||
This function is available in wxGenericDragImage only, and may be overridden (together with
|
||||
\helpref{wxDragImage::DoDrawImage}{wxdragimagedodrawimage}) to provide a virtual drawing capability.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDragImage::Hide}\label{wxdragimagehide}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Hide}{\void}
|
||||
@@ -153,3 +195,21 @@ will be smoother if you move the image when it is shown.
|
||||
|
||||
Shows the image. Call this at least once when dragging.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDragImage::UpdateBackingFromWindow}\label{wxdragimageupdatebackingfromwindow}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{UpdateBackingFromWindow}{\param{wxDC\&}{ windowDC}, \param{wxMemoryDC\&}{ destDC},
|
||||
\param{const wxRect\&}{ sourceRect}, \param{const wxRect\&}{ destRect}}
|
||||
|
||||
Override this if you wish to draw the window contents to the backing bitmap
|
||||
yourself. This can be desirable if you wish to avoid flicker by not having to
|
||||
redraw the updated window itself just before dragging, which can cause a flicker just
|
||||
as the drag starts. Instead, paint the drag image's backing bitmap to show the appropriate
|
||||
graphic {\it minus the objects to be dragged}, and leave the window itself to be updated
|
||||
by the drag image. This can provide eerily smooth, flicker-free drag behaviour.
|
||||
|
||||
The default implementation copies the window contents to the backing bitmap. A new
|
||||
implementation will normally copy information from another source, such as from its
|
||||
own backing bitmap if it has one, or directly from internal data structures.
|
||||
|
||||
This function is available in wxGenericDragImage only.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
This class represents a source for a drag and drop operation.
|
||||
|
||||
See \helpref{Drag'n'Drop overview}{wxdndoverview} and \helpref{wxDataObject overview}{wxdataobjectoverview}
|
||||
See \helpref{Drag and drop overview}{wxdndoverview} and \helpref{wxDataObject overview}{wxdataobjectoverview}
|
||||
for more information.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
@@ -37,12 +37,31 @@ enum wxDragResult
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDropSource::wxDropSource}\label{wxdropsourcewxdropsource}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxDropSource}{\param{wxWindow*}{ win = NULL}}
|
||||
\func{}{wxDropSource}{\param{wxWindow*}{ win = NULL},\param{const wxIconOrCursor\& }{iconCopy = wxNullIconOrCursor}, \param{const wxIconOrCursor\& }{iconCopy = wxNullIconOrCursor}, \param{const wxIconOrCursor\& }{iconNone = wxNullIconOrCursor}}
|
||||
|
||||
Default/wxGTK-specific constructor. If you use the default constructor you must
|
||||
call \helpref{SetData}{wxdropsourcesetdata} later.
|
||||
\func{}{wxDropSource}{\param{wxDataObject\&}{ data}, \param{wxWindow*}{ win = NULL},\param{const wxIconOrCursor\& }{iconCopy = wxNullIconOrCursor}, \param{const wxIconOrCursor\& }{iconCopy = wxNullIconOrCursor}, \param{const wxIconOrCursor\& }{iconNone = wxNullIconOrCursor}}
|
||||
|
||||
Note that {\it win} is required by the GTK port and therefore should always be set.
|
||||
The constructors for wxDataObject.
|
||||
|
||||
If you use the constructor without {\it data} parameter you must call
|
||||
\helpref{SetData}{wxdropsourcesetdata} later.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that the exact type of {\it iconCopy} and subsequent parameters differs
|
||||
between wxMSW and wxGTK: these are cursors under Windows but icons for GTK.
|
||||
You should use the macro \helpref{wxDROP\_ICON}{wxdropicon} in portable
|
||||
programs instead of directly using either of these types.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{win}{The window which initiates the drag and drop operation.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{iconCopy}{The icon or cursor used for feedback for copy operation.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{iconMove}{The icon or cursor used for feedback for move operation.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{iconNone}{The icon or cursor used for feedback when operation can't be done.}
|
||||
|
||||
{\it win} is the window which initiates the drag and drop operation.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxDropSource::\destruct{wxDropSource}}\label{wxdropsourcedtor}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ the whole window area, but only a small portion of it. The normal sequence of ca
|
||||
\helpref{OnEnter}{wxdroptargetonenter}, possibly many times \helpref{OnDragOver}{wxdroptargetondragover},
|
||||
\helpref{OnDrop}{wxdroptargetondrop} and finally \helpref{OnData}{wxdroptargetondata}.
|
||||
|
||||
See \helpref{Drag'n'Drop overview}{wxdndoverview} and \helpref{wxDataObject overview}{wxdataobjectoverview}
|
||||
See \helpref{Drag and drop overview}{wxdndoverview} and \helpref{wxDataObject overview}{wxdataobjectoverview}
|
||||
for more information.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
|
||||
|
||||
This class is capable of converting strings between any two
|
||||
8-bit encodings/charsets. It can also convert from/to Unicode (but only
|
||||
if you compiled wxWindows with wxUSE\_UNICODE set to 1).
|
||||
if you compiled wxWindows with wxUSE\_WCHAR\_T set to 1).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -20,6 +20,7 @@ if you compiled wxWindows with wxUSE\_UNICODE set to 1).
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxFontMapper}{wxfontmapper},
|
||||
\helpref{wxMBConv}{wxmbconv},
|
||||
\helpref{Writing non-English applications}{nonenglishoverview}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -48,14 +49,14 @@ cannot be converted because it does not exist in output encoding:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxCONVERT\_STRICT}}{follow behaviour of GNU Recode -
|
||||
just copy unconvertable characters to output and don't change them
|
||||
just copy unconvertible characters to output and don't change them
|
||||
(its integer value will stay the same)}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxCONVERT\_SUBSTITUTE}}{try some (lossy) substitutions
|
||||
- e.g. replace unconvertable latin capitals with acute by ordinary
|
||||
- e.g. replace unconvertible latin capitals with acute by ordinary
|
||||
capitals, replace en-dash or em-dash by '-' etc.}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
Both modes gurantee that output string will have same length
|
||||
Both modes guarantee that output string will have same length
|
||||
as input string.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
@@ -107,10 +108,10 @@ unix CP1252 {ISO8859_1,ISO8859_15}
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
Equivalence is defined in terms of convertibility:
|
||||
2 encodings are equivalent if you can convert text between
|
||||
then without loosing information (it may - and will - happen
|
||||
that you loose special chars like quotation marks or em-dashes
|
||||
but you shouldn't loose any diacritics and language-specific
|
||||
two encodings are equivalent if you can convert text between
|
||||
then without losing information (it may - and will - happen
|
||||
that you lose special chars like quotation marks or em-dashes
|
||||
but you shouldn't lose any diacritics and language-specific
|
||||
characters when converting between equivalent encodings).
|
||||
|
||||
Remember that this function does {\bf NOT} check for presence of
|
||||
@@ -121,14 +122,14 @@ encodings. (It usually returns only one encoding.)
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\item Note that argument {\it enc} itself may be present in the returned array,
|
||||
so that you can - as a side effect - detect whether the
|
||||
so that you can, as a side-effect, detect whether the
|
||||
encoding is native for this platform or not.
|
||||
\item helpref{Convert}{wxencodingconverterconvert} is not limited to
|
||||
converting between equivalent encodings, it can convert between arbitrary
|
||||
two encodings.
|
||||
\item If {\it enc} is present in returned array, then it is {\bf always} first
|
||||
\item \helpref{Convert}{wxencodingconverterconvert} is not limited to
|
||||
converting between equivalent encodings, it can convert between two arbitrary
|
||||
encodings.
|
||||
\item If {\it enc} is present in the returned array, then it is {\bf always} the first
|
||||
item of it.
|
||||
\item Please note that the returned array may not contain any items at all.
|
||||
\item Please note that the returned array may contain no items at all.
|
||||
\end{itemize}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxEncodingConverter::GetAllEquivalents}\label{wxencodingconvertergetallequivalents}
|
||||
@@ -138,7 +139,7 @@ item of it.
|
||||
Similar to
|
||||
\helpref{GetPlatformEquivalents}{wxencodingconvertergetplatformequivalents},
|
||||
but this one will return ALL
|
||||
equivalent encodings, regardless the platform, and including itself.
|
||||
equivalent encodings, regardless of the platform, and including itself.
|
||||
|
||||
This platform's encodings are before others in the array. And again, if {\it enc} is in the array,
|
||||
it is the very first item in it.
|
||||
|
@@ -63,13 +63,6 @@ Set to TRUE by {\bf Skip} if this event should be skipped.
|
||||
|
||||
Timestamp for this event.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxEvent::GetEventClass}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{WXTYPE}{GetEventClass}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the identifier of the given event class,
|
||||
such as wxTYPE\_MOUSE\_EVENT.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxEvent::GetEventObject}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxObject*}{GetEventObject}{\void}
|
||||
|
@@ -5,6 +5,8 @@ minimize the overhead of using it - in fact, there is hardly any overhead at
|
||||
all, but using it brings you automatic error checking and hides differences
|
||||
between platforms and compilers. wxFile also automatically closes the file in
|
||||
its destructor making it unnecessary to worry about forgetting to do it.
|
||||
wxFile is a wrapper around {\tt file descriptor.} - see also
|
||||
\helpref{wxFFile}{wxffile} for a wrapper around {\tt FILE} structure.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -39,7 +41,7 @@ These constants define the file access rights and are used with
|
||||
\helpref{wxFile::Create}{wxfilecreate} and \helpref{wxFile::Open}{wxfileopen}.
|
||||
|
||||
The {\it OpenMode} enumeration defines the different modes for opening a file,
|
||||
it's defined inside wxFile class so its members should be specified with {\it wxFile::} scope
|
||||
it is defined inside wxFile class so its members should be specified with {\it wxFile::} scope
|
||||
resolution prefix. It is also used with \helpref{wxFile::Access}{wxfileaccess} function.
|
||||
|
||||
\twocolwidtha{7cm}
|
||||
@@ -50,7 +52,8 @@ or test if it can be opened for writing with Access()}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxFile::read\_write}}{Open file for reading and writing; can not be used with Access()}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxFile::write\_append}}{Open file for appending: the file is opened for writing, but the old
|
||||
contents of the file is not erased and the file pointer is initially placed at the end of the file;
|
||||
can not be used with Access()}
|
||||
can not be used with Access(). This is the same as {\bf wxFile::write} if the
|
||||
file doesn't exist.}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
Other constants defined elsewhere but used by wxFile functions are wxInvalidOffset which represents an
|
||||
@@ -158,7 +161,10 @@ in the file.
|
||||
|
||||
Note also that this function doesn't work on unseekable file descriptors
|
||||
(examples include pipes, terminals and sockets under Unix) and an attempt to
|
||||
use it will result in an error message in such case.
|
||||
use it will result in an error message in such case. So, to read the entire
|
||||
file into memory, you should write a loop which uses
|
||||
\helpref{Read}{wxfileread} repeatedly and tests its return condition instead
|
||||
of using Eof() as this will not work for special files under Unix.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFile::Exists}\label{wxfileexists}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -252,11 +258,11 @@ The actual offset position achieved, or wxInvalidOffset on failure.
|
||||
\constfunc{off\_t}{Tell}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the current position or wxInvalidOffset if file is not opened or if another
|
||||
error occured.
|
||||
error occurred.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFile::Write}\label{wxfilewrite}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Write}{\param{const void*}{ buffer}, \param{off\_t}{ count}}
|
||||
\func{size\_t}{Write}{\param{const void*}{ buffer}, \param{off\_t}{ count}}
|
||||
|
||||
Writes the specified number of bytes from a buffer.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -268,7 +274,7 @@ Writes the specified number of bytes from a buffer.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the operation was successful.
|
||||
the number of bytes actually written
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFile::Write}\label{wxfilewrites}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -278,10 +284,11 @@ Writes the contents of the string to the file, returns TRUE on success.
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxFFile}}\label{wxffile}
|
||||
|
||||
A wxFFile performs raw file I/O. This is a very small class designed to
|
||||
wxFFile implements buffered file I/O. This is a very small class designed to
|
||||
minimize the overhead of using it - in fact, there is hardly any overhead at
|
||||
all, but using it brings you automatic error checking and hides differences
|
||||
between platforms and compilers.
|
||||
between platforms and compilers. It wraps inside it a {\tt FILE *} handle used
|
||||
by standard C IO library (also known as {\tt stdio}).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Constructor. Use \helpref{wxFileDialog::ShowModal}{wxfiledialogshowmodal} to sho
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{defaultFile}{The default filename, or the empty string.}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{wildcard}{A wildcard, such as ``*.*".}
|
||||
\docparam{wildcard}{A wildcard, such as ``*.*" or ``BMP files (*.bmp)|*.bmp|GIF files (*.gif)|*.gif".}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{style}{A dialog style. A bitlist of:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -180,13 +180,15 @@ Sets the dialog style. See \helpref{wxFileDialog::wxFileDialog}{wxfiledialogcons
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetWildcard}{\param{const wxString\& }{wildCard}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the wildcard, which in Windows can contain multiple file types.
|
||||
Sets the wildcard, which can contain multiple file types, for example:
|
||||
|
||||
``BMP files (*.bmp)|*.bmp|GIF files (*.gif)|*.gif"
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFileDialog::ShowModal}\label{wxfiledialogshowmodal}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{int}{ShowModal}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Shows the dialog, returning wxID\_OK if the user pressed OK, and wxOK\_CANCEL
|
||||
Shows the dialog, returning wxID\_OK if the user pressed OK, and wxID\_CANCEL
|
||||
otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ will be returned if the corresponding information couldn't be found.
|
||||
The objects of this class are never created by the application code but are
|
||||
returned by \helpref{wxMimeTypesManager::GetFileTypeFromMimeType}{wxmimetypesmanagergetfiletypefrommimetype} and
|
||||
\helpref{wxMimeTypesManager::GetFileTypeFromExtension}{wxmimetypesmanagergetfiletypefromextension} methods.
|
||||
But it's your responsibility to delete the returned pointer when you're done
|
||||
But it is your responsibility to delete the returned pointer when you're done
|
||||
with it!
|
||||
|
||||
% TODO describe MIME types better than this...
|
||||
|
24
docs/latex/wx/flexsizr.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
|
||||
\section{\class{wxFlexGridSizer}}\label{wxflexgridsizer}
|
||||
|
||||
A flex grid sizer is a sizer which lays out its children in a two-dimensional
|
||||
table with all table fields in one row having the same
|
||||
height and all fields in one column having the same width.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxGridSizer}{wxsizer}\\
|
||||
\helpref{wxSizer}{wxsizer}\\
|
||||
\helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxFlexGridSizer::wxFlexGridSizer}\label{wxflexgridsizerwxflexgridsizer}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxFlexGridSizer}{\param{int }{rows}, \param{int }{cols}, \param{int }{vgap}, \param{int }{hgap}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxFlexGridSizer}{\param{int }{cols}, \param{int }{vgap = 0}, \param{int }{hgap = 0}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor for a wxGridSizer. {\it rows} and {\it cols} determine the number of
|
||||
columns and rows in the sizer - if either of the parameters is zero, it will be
|
||||
calculated to form the total number of children in the sizer, thus making the
|
||||
sizer grow dynamically. {\it vgap} and {\it hgap} define extra space between
|
||||
all children.
|
||||
|
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
|
||||
%% Created: 03.11.99
|
||||
%% RCS-ID: $Id$
|
||||
%% Copyright: (c) Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% Licence: wxWindows licence
|
||||
%% License: wxWindows license
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxFontEnumerator}}\label{wxfontenumerator}
|
||||
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 164 B After Width: | Height: | Size: 959 B |
@@ -24,25 +24,29 @@ application windows.
|
||||
|
||||
\twocolwidtha{5cm}
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxDEFAULT\_FRAME\_STYLE}}{Defined as {\bf wxMINIMIZE\_BOX \pipe wxMAXIMIZE\_BOX \pipe wxRESIZE\_BOX \pipe wxSYSTEM\_MENU \pipe wxCAPTION}.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxICONIZE}}{Display the frame iconized (minimized). Windows only. }
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxCAPTION}}{Puts a caption on the frame.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxDEFAULT\_FRAME\_STYLE}}{Defined as {\bf wxMINIMIZE\_BOX \pipe wxMAXIMIZE\_BOX \pipe wxTHICK\_FRAME \pipe wxSYSTEM\_MENU \pipe wxCAPTION}.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxMINIMIZE}}{Identical to {\bf wxICONIZE}. Windows only. }
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxMINIMIZE\_BOX}}{Displays a minimize box on the frame. }
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxMAXIMIZE}}{Displays the frame maximized. Windows only. }
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxMAXIMIZE\_BOX}}{Displays a maximize box on the frame. }
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxSTAY\_ON\_TOP}}{Stay on top of other windows. Windows only. }
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxSYSTEM\_MENU}}{Displays a system menu. }
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxTHICK\_FRAME}}{Displays a thick frame around the window. Windows and Motif only.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxSIMPLE\_BORDER}}{Displays no border or decorations. GTK and Windows only (?). }
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxMINIMIZE}}{Identical to {\bf wxICONIZE}. Windows only.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxMINIMIZE\_BOX}}{Displays a minimize box on the frame.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxMAXIMIZE}}{Displays the frame maximized. Windows only.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxMAXIMIZE\_BOX}}{Displays a maximize box on the frame.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxSTAY\_ON\_TOP}}{Stay on top of other windows. Windows only.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxSYSTEM\_MENU}}{Displays a system menu.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxSIMPLE\_BORDER}}{Displays no border or decorations. GTK and Windows only.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxRESIZE\_BORDER}}{Displays a resizeable border around the window (Unix only).}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxFRAME\_FLOAT\_ON\_PARENT}}{Causes the frame to be above the parent window in the
|
||||
z-order and not shown in the taskbar. Without this style, frames are created as top-level windows that may be obscured by
|
||||
the parent window, and frame titles are shown in the taskbar. Windows and GTK. }
|
||||
the parent window, and frame titles are shown in the taskbar. Windows and GTK.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxFRAME\_TOOL\_WINDOW}}{Causes a frame with a small titlebar to be created;
|
||||
the frame title does not appear in the taskbar. Windows only. }
|
||||
the frame title does not appear in the taskbar. Windows only.}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
The default frame style is for normal, resizeable frames. To create a frame
|
||||
which can not be resized by user, you may use the following combination of
|
||||
styles: {\tt wxDEFAULT\_FRAME\_STYLE \& \~ (wxRESIZE\_BORDER \pipe wxRESIZE\_BOX \pipe wxMAXIMIZE\_BOX)}.
|
||||
% Note: the space after the tilde is necessary or Tex2RTF complains.
|
||||
|
||||
See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
@@ -2,36 +2,37 @@
|
||||
|
||||
The wxHTML library uses a {\bf virtual file systems} mechanism
|
||||
similar to the one used in Midnight Commander, Dos Navigator,
|
||||
FAR or almost any modern file manager. (Do you remember? You can
|
||||
press enter on ZIP file and its contents is displayed as if it
|
||||
were a local directory...)
|
||||
FAR or almost any modern file manager. It allows the user to access
|
||||
data stored in archives as if they were ordinary files. On-the-fly
|
||||
generated files that exist only in memory are also supported.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Classes}
|
||||
|
||||
Three classes are used in order to provide full VFS:
|
||||
Three classes are used in order to provide virtual file systems mechanism:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\item The \helpref{wxFSFile}{wxfsfile} class provides information
|
||||
on opened file (name, input stream, mime type and anchor).
|
||||
about opened file (name, input stream, mime type and anchor).
|
||||
\item The \helpref{wxFileSystem}{wxfilesystem} class is the interface.
|
||||
Its main methods are ChangePathTo() and OpenFile(). This class
|
||||
is most often used by the end user.
|
||||
\item The \helpref{wxFileSystemHandler}{wxfilesystemhandler} is the core
|
||||
if VFS mechanism. You can derive your own handler and pass it to
|
||||
of virtual file systems mechanism. You can derive your own handler and pass it to
|
||||
of the VFS mechanism. You can derive your own handler and pass it to
|
||||
wxFileSystem's AddHandler() method. In the new handler you only need to
|
||||
overwrite OpenFile() and CanOpen() methods.
|
||||
override the OpenFile() and CanOpen() methods.
|
||||
\end{itemize}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Locations}
|
||||
|
||||
Locations (aka filenames aka addresses) are constructed from 4 parts:
|
||||
Locations (aka filenames aka addresses) are constructed from four parts:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\item {\bf protocol} - handler can recognize if it is able to open a
|
||||
file by checking its protocol. Examples are "http", "file" or "ftp".
|
||||
\item {\bf right location} - is the name of file within the protocol.
|
||||
In "http://www.wxwindows.org/index.html" the right location is "//www.wxwindows.org/index.html".
|
||||
\item {\bf anchor} - anchor is optional and is usually not present.
|
||||
\item {\bf anchor} - an anchor is optional and is usually not present.
|
||||
In "index.htm\#chapter2" the anchor is "chapter2".
|
||||
\item {\bf left location} - this is usually an empty string.
|
||||
It is used by 'local' protocols such as ZIP.
|
||||
@@ -40,33 +41,26 @@ See Combined Protocols paragraph for details.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Combined Protocols}
|
||||
|
||||
Left location pretends protocol in URL string.
|
||||
It's not used by global protocols like HTTP but it's used
|
||||
by local ones - for example you can see this address:
|
||||
The left location precedes the protocol in the URL string.
|
||||
It is not used by global protocols like HTTP but it becomes handy when nesting
|
||||
protocols - for example you may want to access files in a ZIP archive:
|
||||
|
||||
file:archives/cpp\_doc.zip\#zip:reference/fopen.htm\#syntax
|
||||
|
||||
In this example, protocol is "zip", left location is
|
||||
"reference/fopen.htm", anchor is "syntax" and right location
|
||||
is "file:archives/cpp\_doc.zip". It is used by zip handler
|
||||
to determine in what file this particular zip VFS is stored.
|
||||
In this example, the protocol is "zip", the left location is
|
||||
"reference/fopen.htm", the anchor is "syntax" and the right location
|
||||
is "file:archives/cpp\_doc.zip".
|
||||
|
||||
In fact there are two protocols used in this example: zip and file.
|
||||
You can construct even more complicated addresses like this one:
|
||||
|
||||
http://www.archives.org/myarchive.zip\#zip:local/docs/cpp/stdio.zip\#zip:index.htm
|
||||
|
||||
In this example you access zip VFS stdio.zip stored in another zip (myarchive.zip)
|
||||
which is at WWW.
|
||||
There are {\bf two} protocols used in this example: "zip" and "file".
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{File Systems Included in wxHTML}
|
||||
|
||||
Following VFS handlers are part of wxWindows so far:
|
||||
The following virtual file system handlers are part of wxWindows so far:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxInternetFSHandler}}{Handler for accessing documents
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxInternetFSHandler}}{A handler for accessing documents
|
||||
via HTTP or FTP protocols. Include file is <wx/fs_inet.h>.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxZipFSHandler}}{Handler for ZIP archives.
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxZipFSHandler}}{A handler for ZIP archives.
|
||||
Include file is <wx/fs_zip.h>. URL is in form "archive.zip\#zip:filename".}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxMemoryFSHandler}}{This handler allows you to access
|
||||
data stored in memory (such as bitmaps) as if they were regular files.
|
||||
@@ -75,9 +69,11 @@ Include file is <wx/fs_mem.h>. UURL is prefixed with memory:, e.g.
|
||||
"memory:myfile.htm"}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
In addition, wxFileSystem can access local files.
|
||||
In addition, wxFileSystem itself can access local files.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Initializing file system handlers}
|
||||
|
||||
Use \helpref{wxFileSystem::AddHandler}{wxfilesystemaddhandler} to initialize
|
||||
a handler, for example:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -90,7 +86,6 @@ bool MyApp::OnInit()
|
||||
{
|
||||
wxFileSystem::AddHandler(new wxMemoryFSHandler);
|
||||
...
|
||||
}
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -87,6 +87,8 @@ data (bitmap, text or raw data)
|
||||
will be copied into private memory stream and available under
|
||||
name "memory:" + filename.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that when storing image/bitmap, you must use image format that wxWindows
|
||||
can write (e.g. JPG, PNG, see \helpref{wxImage documentation}{wximage})!
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMemoryFSHandler::RemoveFile}\label{wxmemoryfshandlerremovefile}
|
||||
|
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ It provides more information than wxWindow's input stream
|
||||
{\bf Note:} Any pointer returned by wxFSFile's member is valid
|
||||
only as long as wxFSFile object exists. For example a call to GetStream()
|
||||
doesn't {\it create} the stream but only returns the pointer to it. In
|
||||
other words after 10 calls to GetStream() you'll obtain ten identical
|
||||
other words after 10 calls to GetStream() you will obtain ten identical
|
||||
pointers.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ functions.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Notes}
|
||||
|
||||
It is seldom used by the application programmer but you'll need it if
|
||||
It is seldom used by the application programmer but you will need it if
|
||||
you are writing your own virtual FS. For example you may need something
|
||||
similar to wxMemoryInputStream, but because wxMemoryInputStream
|
||||
doesn't free the memory when destroyed and thus passing a memory stream
|
||||
|
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ You will be notified when the EOF is reached by an error.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns NULL if an error occured (it could be a network failure or the fact
|
||||
Returns NULL if an error occurred (it could be a network failure or the fact
|
||||
that the file doesn't exist).
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the initialized stream. You will have to delete it yourself when you
|
||||
|
@@ -2,7 +2,51 @@
|
||||
\setheader{{\it CHAPTER \thechapter}}{}{}{}{}{{\it CHAPTER \thechapter}}%
|
||||
\setfooter{\thepage}{}{}{}{}{\thepage}
|
||||
|
||||
The functions defined in wxWindows are described here.
|
||||
The functions and macros defined in wxWindows are described here.
|
||||
|
||||
\section{Version macros}\label{versionfunctions}
|
||||
|
||||
The following constants are defined in wxWindows:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\item {\tt wxMAJOR\_VERSION} is the major version of wxWindows
|
||||
\item {\tt wxMINOR\_VERSION} is the minor version of wxWindows
|
||||
\item {\tt wxRELASE\_NUMBER} is the release number
|
||||
\end{itemize}
|
||||
|
||||
For example, the values or these constants for wxWindows 2.1.15 are 2, 1 and
|
||||
15.
|
||||
|
||||
Additionally, {\tt wxVERSION\_STRING} is a user-readable string containing
|
||||
the full wxWindows version and {\tt wxVERSION\_NUMBER} is a combination of the
|
||||
three version numbers above: for 2.1.15, it is 2115 and it is 2200 for
|
||||
wxWindows 2.2.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/version.h> or <wx/defs.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxCHECK\_VERSION}\label{wxcheckversion}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxCHECK\_VERSION}{\param{}{major, minor, release}}
|
||||
|
||||
This is a macro which evaluates to true if the current wxWindows version is at
|
||||
least major.minor.release.
|
||||
|
||||
For example, to test if the program is compiled with wxWindows 2.2 or higher,
|
||||
the following can be done:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
wxString s;
|
||||
#if wxCHECK_VERSION(2, 2, 0)
|
||||
if ( s.StartsWith("foo") )
|
||||
#else // replacement code for old version
|
||||
if ( strncmp(s, "foo", 3) == 0 )
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
{
|
||||
...
|
||||
}
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
\section{Thread functions}\label{threadfunctions}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -21,8 +65,8 @@ The functions defined in wxWindows are described here.
|
||||
This function must be called when any thread other than the main GUI thread
|
||||
wants to get access to the GUI library. This function will block the execution
|
||||
of the calling thread until the main thread (or any other thread holding the
|
||||
main GUI lock) leaves the GUI library and no other other thread will enter
|
||||
the GUI library until the calling thread calls \helpref{::wxMutexGuiLeave()}{wxmutexguileave}.
|
||||
main GUI lock) leaves the GUI library and no other thread will enter the GUI
|
||||
library until the calling thread calls \helpref{::wxMutexGuiLeave()}{wxmutexguileave}.
|
||||
|
||||
Typically, these functions are used like this:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -45,7 +89,7 @@ Note that under GTK, no creation of top-level windows is allowed in any
|
||||
thread but the main one.
|
||||
|
||||
This function is only defined on platforms which support preemptive
|
||||
threads.
|
||||
threads.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxMutexGuiLeave}\label{wxmutexguileave}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -86,7 +130,7 @@ slashes.
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the file exists. It also returns TRUE if the file is
|
||||
a directory.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxFileModificationTime}
|
||||
\membersection{::wxFileModificationTime}\label{wxfilemodificationtime}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{time\_t}{wxFileModificationTime}{\param{const wxString\& }{filename}}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -270,7 +314,7 @@ wxSplitPath() will correctly handle filenames with both DOS and Unix path separa
|
||||
Windows, however it will not consider backslashes as path separators under Unix (where backslash
|
||||
is a valid character in a filename).
|
||||
|
||||
On entry, {\it fullname} should be non NULL (it may be empty though).
|
||||
On entry, {\it fullname} should be non-NULL (it may be empty though).
|
||||
|
||||
On return, {\it path} contains the file path (without the trailing separator), {\it name}
|
||||
contains the file name and {\it ext} contains the file extension without leading dot. All
|
||||
@@ -632,7 +676,7 @@ to be used for entering passwords as the function name implies.
|
||||
\param{const wxString\& }{default\_value = ``"}, \param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL},\\
|
||||
\param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1}, \param{bool}{ centre = TRUE}}
|
||||
|
||||
Pop up a dialog box with title set to {\it caption}, message {\it message}, and a
|
||||
Pop up a dialog box with title set to {\it caption}, {\it message}, and a
|
||||
\rtfsp{\it default\_value}. The user may type in text and press OK to return this text,
|
||||
or press Cancel to return the empty string.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -730,7 +774,8 @@ wxYES\_NO or wxOK.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{wxOK}{Puts an Ok button on the message box. May be combined with wxCANCEL.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{wxCENTRE}{Centres the text.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{wxICON\_EXCLAMATION}{Displays an exclamation mark symbol.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{wxICON\_HAND}{Displays a hand symbol.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{wxICON\_HAND}{Displays an error symbol.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{wxICON\_ERROR}{Displays an error symbol - the same as wxICON\_HAND.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{wxICON\_QUESTION}{Displays a question mark symbol.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{wxICON\_INFORMATION}{Displays an information symbol.}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
@@ -1056,6 +1101,21 @@ The clipboard must have previously been opened for this call to succeed.
|
||||
|
||||
\section{Miscellaneous functions}\label{miscellany}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxDROP\_ICON}\label{wxdropicon}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxIconOrCursor}{wxDROP\_ICON}{\param{const char *}{name}}
|
||||
|
||||
This macro creates either a cursor (MSW) or an icon (elsewhere) with the given
|
||||
name. Under MSW, the cursor is loaded from the resource file and the icon is
|
||||
loaded from XPM file under other platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
This macro should be used with
|
||||
\helpref{wxDropSource constructor}{wxdropsourcewxdropsource}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/dnd.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxNewId}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{long}{wxNewId}{\void}
|
||||
@@ -1260,6 +1320,8 @@ wxWindows errors. See also \helpref{wxFatalError}{wxfatalerror}.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{long}{wxExecute}{\param{const wxString\& }{command}, \param{wxArrayString\& }{output}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{long}{wxExecute}{\param{const wxString\& }{command}, \param{wxArrayString\& }{output}, \param{wxArrayString\& }{errors}}
|
||||
|
||||
Executes another program in Unix or Windows.
|
||||
|
||||
The first form takes a command string, such as {\tt "emacs file.txt"}.
|
||||
@@ -1267,8 +1329,8 @@ The first form takes a command string, such as {\tt "emacs file.txt"}.
|
||||
The second form takes an array of values: a command, any number of
|
||||
arguments, terminated by NULL.
|
||||
|
||||
The semantics of the third version is different from the first two and is
|
||||
described in more details below.
|
||||
The semantics of the third and fourth versions is different from the first two
|
||||
and is described in more details below.
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it sync} is FALSE (the default), flow of control immediately returns.
|
||||
If TRUE, the current application waits until the other program has terminated.
|
||||
@@ -1282,16 +1344,22 @@ should ensure that this can cause no recursion, in the simplest case by
|
||||
calling \helpref{wxEnableTopLevelWindows(FALSE)}{wxenabletoplevelwindows}.
|
||||
|
||||
For asynchronous execution, however, the return value is the process id and
|
||||
zero value indicates that the command could not be executed.
|
||||
zero value indicates that the command could not be executed. As an added
|
||||
complication, the return value of $-1$ in this case indicattes that we didn't
|
||||
launch a new process, but connected to the running one (this can only happen in
|
||||
case of using DDE under Windows for command execution). In particular, in this,
|
||||
and only this, case the calling code will not get the notification about
|
||||
process termination.
|
||||
|
||||
If callback isn't NULL and if execution is asynchronous (note that callback
|
||||
parameter can not be non NULL for synchronous execution),
|
||||
parameter can not be non-NULL for synchronous execution),
|
||||
\helpref{wxProcess::OnTerminate}{wxprocessonterminate} will be called when
|
||||
the process finishes.
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, you may use the third overloaded version of this function to execute
|
||||
a process (always synchronously) and capture its output in the array
|
||||
{\it output}.
|
||||
{\it output}. The fourth version adds the possibility to additionally capture
|
||||
the messages from standard error output in the {\it errors} array.
|
||||
|
||||
See also \helpref{wxShell}{wxshell}, \helpref{wxProcess}{wxprocess},
|
||||
\helpref{Exec sample}{sampleexec}.
|
||||
@@ -1397,21 +1465,6 @@ Return the (current) user's home directory.
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/utils.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxGetElapsedTime}\label{wxgetelapsedtime}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{long}{wxGetElapsedTime}{\param{bool}{ resetTimer = TRUE}}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the time in milliseconds since the last \helpref{::wxStartTimer}{wxstarttimer}.
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it resetTimer} is TRUE (the default), the timer is reset to zero
|
||||
by this call.
|
||||
|
||||
See also \helpref{wxTimer}{wxtimer}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/timer.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxGetFreeMemory}\label{wxgetfreememory}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{long}{wxGetFreeMemory}{\void}
|
||||
@@ -1439,7 +1492,7 @@ Returns the mouse position in screen coordinates.
|
||||
\func{wxString}{wxGetOsDescription}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the string containing the description of the current platform in a
|
||||
user-readable form. For example, this function may return strings like
|
||||
user-readable form. For example, this function may return strings like
|
||||
{\tt Windows NT Version 4.0} or {\tt Linux 2.2.2 i386}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
@@ -1457,7 +1510,7 @@ user-readable form. For example, this function may return strings like
|
||||
Gets operating system version information.
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitemruled{Platform}{Return tyes}
|
||||
\twocolitemruled{Platform}{Return types}
|
||||
\twocolitem{Macintosh}{Return value is wxMACINTOSH.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{GTK}{Return value is wxGTK, For GTK 1.0, {\it major} is 1, {\it minor} is 0. }
|
||||
\twocolitem{Motif}{Return value is wxMOTIF\_X, {\it major} is X version, {\it minor} is X revision.}
|
||||
@@ -1741,18 +1794,6 @@ as a keyboard shortkey in Windows and Motif) and $\backslash$t (tab in Windows).
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/utils.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxStartTimer}\label{wxstarttimer}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{wxStartTimer}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Starts a stopwatch; use \helpref{::wxGetElapsedTime}{wxgetelapsedtime} to get the elapsed time.
|
||||
|
||||
See also \helpref{wxTimer}{wxtimer}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/timer.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxToLower}\label{wxtolower}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{char}{wxToLower}{\param{char }{ch}}
|
||||
@@ -1862,7 +1903,7 @@ function.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that wxYield will not flush the message logs. This is intentional as
|
||||
calling wxYield is usually done to quickly update the screen and popping up a
|
||||
message box dialog may be undesirable. If you do with to flush the log
|
||||
message box dialog may be undesirable. If you do wish to flush the log
|
||||
messages immediately (otherwise it will be done during the next idle loop
|
||||
iteration), call \helpref{wxLog::FlushActive}{wxlogflushactive}.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1876,7 +1917,7 @@ iteration), call \helpref{wxLog::FlushActive}{wxlogflushactive}.
|
||||
|
||||
This functions wakes up the (internal and platform dependent) idle system, i.e. it
|
||||
will force the system to send an idle event even if the system currently {\it is}
|
||||
idle and thus would not send any idle event until after some other event would get
|
||||
idle and thus would not send any idle event until after some other event would get
|
||||
sent. This is also useful for sending events between two threads and is used by
|
||||
the corresponding functions \helpref{::wxPostEvent}{wxpostevent} and
|
||||
\helpref{wxEvtHandler::AddPendingEvent}{wxevthandleraddpendingevent}.
|
||||
@@ -2008,7 +2049,7 @@ dynamically. The same as DECLARE\_ABSTRACT\_CLASS.
|
||||
\func{}{DECLARE\_DYNAMIC\_CLASS}{className}
|
||||
|
||||
Used inside a class declaration to declare that the objects of this class should be dynamically
|
||||
createable from run-time type information.
|
||||
creatable from run-time type information.
|
||||
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -2162,6 +2203,18 @@ avoid using {\tt \#ifdef}s when creating bitmaps.
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/gdicmn.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxConstCast}\label{wxconstcast}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxConstCast}{ptr, classname}
|
||||
|
||||
This macro expands into {\tt const\_cast<classname *>(ptr)} if the compiler
|
||||
supports {\it const\_cast} or into an old, C-style cast, otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxDynamicCast}{wxdynamiccast}\\
|
||||
\helpref{wxStaticCast}{wxstaticcast}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{WXDEBUG\_NEW}\label{debugnew}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{WXDEBUG\_NEW}{arg}
|
||||
@@ -2185,7 +2238,7 @@ In non-debug mode, this is defined as the normal new operator.
|
||||
|
||||
This macro returns the pointer {\it ptr} cast to the type {\it classname *} if
|
||||
the pointer is of this type (the check is done during the run-time) or NULL
|
||||
otherwise. Usage of this macro is prefered over obsoleted wxObject::IsKindOf()
|
||||
otherwise. Usage of this macro is preferred over obsoleted wxObject::IsKindOf()
|
||||
function.
|
||||
|
||||
The {\it ptr} argument may be NULL, in which case NULL will be returned.
|
||||
@@ -2201,13 +2254,15 @@ Example:
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
// no window has the focus or it's not a text control
|
||||
// no window has the focus or it is not a text control
|
||||
}
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{RTTI overview}{runtimeclassoverview}
|
||||
\helpref{RTTI overview}{runtimeclassoverview}\\
|
||||
\helpref{wxConstCast}{wxconstcast}\\
|
||||
\helpref{wxStatiicCast}{wxstaticcast}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxICON}\label{wxiconmacro}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -2226,6 +2281,17 @@ avoid using {\tt \#ifdef}s when creating icons.
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/gdicmn.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxStaticCast}\label{wxstaticcast}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxStaticCast}{ptr, classname}
|
||||
|
||||
This macro checks that the cast is valid in debug mode (an assert failure will
|
||||
result if {\tt wxDynamicCast(ptr, classname) == NULL}) and then returns the
|
||||
result of executing an equivalent of {\tt static\_cast<classname *>(ptr)}.
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxDynamicCast}{wxdynamiccast}\\
|
||||
\helpref{wxConstCast}{wxconstcast}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{WXTRACE}\label{trace}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
@@ -2268,15 +2334,13 @@ files and loading user interface elements from resources.
|
||||
|
||||
\normalbox{Please note that this use of the word `resource' is different from that used when talking
|
||||
about initialisation file resource reading and writing, using such functions
|
||||
as wxWriteResource and wxGetResource. It's just an unfortunate clash of terminology.}
|
||||
as wxWriteResource and wxGetResource. It is just an unfortunate clash of terminology.}
|
||||
|
||||
\helponly{For an overview of the wxWindows resource mechanism, see \helpref{the wxWindows resource system}{resourceformats}.}
|
||||
|
||||
See also \helpref{wxWindow::LoadFromResource}{wxwindowloadfromresource} for
|
||||
loading from resource data.
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf Warning:} this needs updating for wxWindows 2.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxResourceAddIdentifier}\label{wxresourceaddidentifier}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxResourceAddIdentifier}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{int }{value}}
|
||||
@@ -2300,15 +2364,15 @@ wxWindows bitmap resource identifier. For example, if the .WXR file contains
|
||||
the following:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
static const wxString\& aiai_resource = "bitmap(name = 'aiai_resource',\
|
||||
bitmap = ['aiai', wxBITMAP_TYPE_BMP_RESOURCE, 'WINDOWS'],\
|
||||
bitmap = ['aiai.xpm', wxBITMAP_TYPE_XPM, 'X']).";
|
||||
static const wxString\& project_resource = "bitmap(name = 'project_resource',\
|
||||
bitmap = ['project', wxBITMAP_TYPE_BMP_RESOURCE, 'WINDOWS'],\
|
||||
bitmap = ['project.xpm', wxBITMAP_TYPE_XPM, 'X']).";
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
then this function can be called as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
wxBitmap *bitmap = wxResourceCreateBitmap("aiai_resource");
|
||||
wxBitmap *bitmap = wxResourceCreateBitmap("project_resource");
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxResourceCreateIcon}
|
||||
@@ -2320,15 +2384,15 @@ wxWindows icon resource identifier. For example, if the .WXR file contains
|
||||
the following:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
static const wxString\& aiai_resource = "icon(name = 'aiai_resource',\
|
||||
icon = ['aiai', wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO_RESOURCE, 'WINDOWS'],\
|
||||
icon = ['aiai', wxBITMAP_TYPE_XBM_DATA, 'X']).";
|
||||
static const wxString\& project_resource = "icon(name = 'project_resource',\
|
||||
icon = ['project', wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO_RESOURCE, 'WINDOWS'],\
|
||||
icon = ['project', wxBITMAP_TYPE_XBM_DATA, 'X']).";
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
then this function can be called as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
wxIcon *icon = wxResourceCreateIcon("aiai_resource");
|
||||
wxIcon *icon = wxResourceCreateIcon("project_resource");
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxResourceCreateMenuBar}
|
||||
@@ -2387,9 +2451,9 @@ dialog(name = 'dialog1',
|
||||
title = 'Test dialog box',
|
||||
x = 312, y = 234, width = 400, height = 300,
|
||||
modal = 0,
|
||||
control = [wxGroupBox, 'Groupbox', '0', 'group6', 5, 4, 380, 262,
|
||||
control = [1000, wxStaticBox, 'Groupbox', '0', 'group6', 5, 4, 380, 262,
|
||||
[11, 'wxSWISS', 'wxNORMAL', 'wxNORMAL', 0]],
|
||||
control = [wxMultiText, 'Multitext', 'wxVERTICAL_LABEL', 'multitext3',
|
||||
control = [1001, wxTextCtrl, '', 'wxTE_MULTILINE', 'text3',
|
||||
156, 126, 200, 70, 'wxWindows is a multi-platform, GUI toolkit.',
|
||||
[11, 'wxSWISS', 'wxNORMAL', 'wxNORMAL', 0],
|
||||
[11, 'wxSWISS', 'wxNORMAL', 'wxNORMAL', 0]]).
|
||||
@@ -2415,7 +2479,7 @@ wxWindows resource data.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxResourceParseString}\label{wxresourceparsestring}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxResourceParseString}{\param{const wxString\& }{resource}, \param{wxResourceTable *}{table = NULL}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxResourceParseString}{\param{char*}{ s}, \param{wxResourceTable *}{table = NULL}}
|
||||
|
||||
Parses a string containing one or more wxWindows resource objects. If
|
||||
the resource objects are global static data that are included into the
|
||||
@@ -2425,17 +2489,17 @@ containing the resource data, to make it known to wxWindows.
|
||||
{\it resource} should contain data with the following form:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
static const wxString\& dialog1 = "dialog(name = 'dialog1',\
|
||||
style = 'wxCAPTION | wxDEFAULT_DIALOG_STYLE',\
|
||||
title = 'Test dialog box',\
|
||||
x = 312, y = 234, width = 400, height = 300,\
|
||||
modal = 0,\
|
||||
control = [wxGroupBox, 'Groupbox', '0', 'group6', 5, 4, 380, 262,\
|
||||
[11, 'wxSWISS', 'wxNORMAL', 'wxNORMAL', 0]],\
|
||||
control = [wxMultiText, 'Multitext', 'wxVERTICAL_LABEL', 'multitext3',\
|
||||
156, 126, 200, 70, 'wxWindows is a multi-platform, GUI toolkit.',\
|
||||
[11, 'wxSWISS', 'wxNORMAL', 'wxNORMAL', 0],\
|
||||
[11, 'wxSWISS', 'wxNORMAL', 'wxNORMAL', 0]]).";
|
||||
dialog(name = 'dialog1',
|
||||
style = 'wxCAPTION | wxDEFAULT_DIALOG_STYLE',
|
||||
title = 'Test dialog box',
|
||||
x = 312, y = 234, width = 400, height = 300,
|
||||
modal = 0,
|
||||
control = [1000, wxStaticBox, 'Groupbox', '0', 'group6', 5, 4, 380, 262,
|
||||
[11, 'wxSWISS', 'wxNORMAL', 'wxNORMAL', 0]],
|
||||
control = [1001, wxTextCtrl, '', 'wxTE_MULTILINE', 'text3',
|
||||
156, 126, 200, 70, 'wxWindows is a multi-platform, GUI toolkit.',
|
||||
[11, 'wxSWISS', 'wxNORMAL', 'wxNORMAL', 0],
|
||||
[11, 'wxSWISS', 'wxNORMAL', 'wxNORMAL', 0]]).
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
This function will typically be used after calling \helpref{wxLoadUserResource}{wxloaduserresource} to
|
||||
@@ -2443,10 +2507,10 @@ load an entire {\tt .wxr file} into a string.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxResourceRegisterBitmapData}\label{registerbitmapdata}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxResourceRegisterBitmapData}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{const wxString\& }{xbm\_data}, \param{int }{width},
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxResourceRegisterBitmapData}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{char* }{xbm\_data}, \param{int }{width},
|
||||
\param{int }{height}, \param{wxResourceTable *}{table = NULL}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxResourceRegisterBitmapData}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{const wxString\& *}{xpm\_data}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{wxResourceRegisterBitmapData}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{char** }{xpm\_data}}
|
||||
|
||||
Makes \verb$#$included XBM or XPM bitmap data known to the wxWindows resource system.
|
||||
This is required if other resources will use the bitmap data, since otherwise there
|
||||
@@ -2504,7 +2568,7 @@ meaningless.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{wxLogVerbose}{\param{const char*}{ formatString}, \param{...}{}}
|
||||
|
||||
For verbose output. Normally, it's suppressed, but
|
||||
For verbose output. Normally, it is suppressed, but
|
||||
might be activated if the user wishes to know more details about the program
|
||||
progress (another, but possibly confusing name for the same function is {\bf wxLogInfo}).
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -2528,7 +2592,7 @@ Mostly used by wxWindows itself, but might be handy for logging errors after
|
||||
system call (API function) failure. It logs the specified message text as well
|
||||
as the last system error code ({\it errno} or {\it ::GetLastError()} depending
|
||||
on the platform) and the corresponding error message. The second form
|
||||
of this function takes the error code explitly as the first argument.
|
||||
of this function takes the error code explicitly as the first argument.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -2615,9 +2679,89 @@ Returns the error message corresponding to the given system error code. If
|
||||
\helpref{wxSysErrorCode}{wxsyserrorcode},
|
||||
\helpref{wxLogSysError}{wxlogsyserror}
|
||||
|
||||
\section{Time functions}\label{timefunctions}
|
||||
|
||||
The functions in this section deal with getting the current time and
|
||||
starting/stopping the global timers. Please note that the timer functions are
|
||||
deprecated because they work with one global timer only and
|
||||
\helpref{wxTimer}{wxtimer} and/or \helpref{wxStopWatch}{wxstopwatch} classes
|
||||
should be used instead. For retrieving the current time, you may also use
|
||||
\helpref{wxDateTime::Now}{wxdatetimenow} or
|
||||
\helpref{wxDateTime::UNow}{wxdatetimeunow} methods.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxGetElapsedTime}\label{wxgetelapsedtime}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{long}{wxGetElapsedTime}{\param{bool}{ resetTimer = TRUE}}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the time in milliseconds since the last \helpref{::wxStartTimer}{wxstarttimer}.
|
||||
|
||||
If {\it resetTimer} is TRUE (the default), the timer is reset to zero
|
||||
by this call.
|
||||
|
||||
See also \helpref{wxTimer}{wxtimer}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/timer.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxGetLocalTime}\label{wxgetlocaltime}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{long}{wxGetLocalTime}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the number of seconds since local time 00:00:00 Jan 1st 1970.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxDateTime::Now}{wxdatetimenow}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/timer.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxGetLocalTimeMillis}\label{wxgetlocaltimemillis}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxLongLone}{wxGetLocalTimeMillis}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the number of milliseconds since local time 00:00:00 Jan 1st 1970.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxDateTime::Now}{wxdatetimenow},\\
|
||||
\helpref{wxLongLone}{wxlonglong}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/timer.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxGetUTCTime}\label{wxgetutctime}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{long}{wxGetUTCTime}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the number of seconds since GMT 00:00:00 Jan 1st 1970.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxDateTime::Now}{wxdatetimenow}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/timer.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{::wxStartTimer}\label{wxstarttimer}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{wxStartTimer}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Starts a stopwatch; use \helpref{::wxGetElapsedTime}{wxgetelapsedtime} to get the elapsed time.
|
||||
|
||||
See also \helpref{wxTimer}{wxtimer}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/timer.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\section{Debugging macros and functions}\label{debugmacros}
|
||||
|
||||
Useful macros and functins for error checking and defensive programming. ASSERTs are only
|
||||
Useful macros and functions for error checking and defensive programming. ASSERTs are only
|
||||
compiled if \_\_WXDEBUG\_\_ is defined, whereas CHECK macros stay in release
|
||||
builds.
|
||||
|
||||
|
170
docs/latex/wx/gridattr.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
|
||||
%
|
||||
% automatically generated by HelpGen from
|
||||
% grid.h at 11/May/00 18:30:19
|
||||
%
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxGridCellAttr}}\label{wxgridcellattr}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxGridCellAttr: this class can be used to alter the cells appearance in
|
||||
the grid by changing their colour/font/... from default. An object of this
|
||||
class may be returned by wxGridTable::GetAttr().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
No base class
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Data structures}
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::wxGridCellAttr}\label{wxgridcellattrwxgridcellattr}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxGridCellAttr}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
ctors
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::wxGridCellAttr}\label{wxgridcellattrwxgridcellattr}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxGridCellAttr}{\param{const wxColour\& }{colText}, \param{const wxColour\& }{colBack}, \param{const wxFont\& }{font}, \param{int }{hAlign}, \param{int }{vAlign}}
|
||||
|
||||
VZ: considering the number of members wxGridCellAttr has now, this ctor
|
||||
seems to be pretty useless... may be we should just remove it?
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::Clone}\label{wxgridcellattrclone}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxGridCellAttr*}{Clone}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
creates a new copy of this object
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::IncRef}\label{wxgridcellattrincref}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{IncRef}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
this class is ref counted: it is created with ref count of 1, so
|
||||
calling DecRef() once will delete it. Calling IncRef() allows to lock
|
||||
it until the matching DecRef() is called
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::DecRef}\label{wxgridcellattrdecref}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{DecRef}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::SetTextColour}\label{wxgridcellattrsettextcolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetTextColour}{\param{const wxColour\& }{colText}}
|
||||
|
||||
setters
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::SetBackgroundColour}\label{wxgridcellattrsetbackgroundcolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetBackgroundColour}{\param{const wxColour\& }{colBack}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::SetFont}\label{wxgridcellattrsetfont}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetFont}{\param{const wxFont\& }{font}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::SetAlignment}\label{wxgridcellattrsetalignment}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetAlignment}{\param{int }{hAlign}, \param{int }{vAlign}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::SetReadOnly}\label{wxgridcellattrsetreadonly}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetReadOnly}{\param{bool }{isReadOnly = TRUE}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::SetRenderer}\label{wxgridcellattrsetrenderer}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetRenderer}{\param{wxGridCellRenderer* }{renderer}}
|
||||
|
||||
takes ownership of the pointer
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::SetEditor}\label{wxgridcellattrseteditor}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetEditor}{\param{wxGridCellEditor* }{editor}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::HasTextColour}\label{wxgridcellattrhastextcolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasTextColour}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
accessors
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::HasBackgroundColour}\label{wxgridcellattrhasbackgroundcolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasBackgroundColour}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::HasFont}\label{wxgridcellattrhasfont}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasFont}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::HasAlignment}\label{wxgridcellattrhasalignment}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasAlignment}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::HasRenderer}\label{wxgridcellattrhasrenderer}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasRenderer}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::HasEditor}\label{wxgridcellattrhaseditor}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasEditor}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::GetTextColour}\label{wxgridcellattrgettextcolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxColour\&}{GetTextColour}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::GetBackgroundColour}\label{wxgridcellattrgetbackgroundcolour}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxColour\&}{GetBackgroundColour}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::GetFont}\label{wxgridcellattrgetfont}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxFont\&}{GetFont}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::GetAlignment}\label{wxgridcellattrgetalignment}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{void}{GetAlignment}{\param{int* }{hAlign}, \param{int* }{vAlign}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::GetRenderer}\label{wxgridcellattrgetrenderer}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxGridCellRenderer*}{GetRenderer}{\param{wxGrid* }{grid}, \param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::GetEditor}\label{wxgridcellattrgeteditor}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxGridCellEditor*}{GetEditor}{\param{wxGrid* }{grid}, \param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::IsReadOnly}\label{wxgridcellattrisreadonly}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsReadOnly}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::SetDefAttr}\label{wxgridcellattrsetdefattr}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetDefAttr}{\param{wxGridCellAttr* }{defAttr}}
|
||||
|
134
docs/latex/wx/gridedit.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,134 @@
|
||||
%
|
||||
% automatically generated by HelpGen from
|
||||
% grid.h at 11/May/00 18:30:18
|
||||
%
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxGridCellEditor}}\label{wxgridcelleditor}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor: This class is responsible for providing and manipulating
|
||||
the in-place edit controls for the grid. Instances of wxGridCellEditor
|
||||
(actually, instances of derived classes since it is an ABC) can be
|
||||
associated with the cell attributes for individual cells, rows, columns, or
|
||||
even for the entire grid.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxGridCellWorker}{wxgridcellworker}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Data structures}
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellEditor::wxGridCellEditor}\label{wxgridcelleditorwxgridcelleditor}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxGridCellEditor}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellEditor::IsCreated}\label{wxgridcelleditoriscreated}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{IsCreated}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellEditor::Create}\label{wxgridcelleditorcreate}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Create}{\param{wxWindow* }{parent}, \param{wxWindowID }{id}, \param{wxEvtHandler* }{evtHandler}}
|
||||
|
||||
Creates the actual edit control
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellEditor::SetSize}\label{wxgridcelleditorsetsize}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetSize}{\param{const wxRect\& }{rect}}
|
||||
|
||||
Size and position the edit control
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellEditor::Show}\label{wxgridcelleditorshow}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Show}{\param{bool }{show}, \param{wxGridCellAttr* }{attr = NULL}}
|
||||
|
||||
Show or hide the edit control, use the specified attributes to set
|
||||
colours/fonts for it
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellEditor::PaintBackground}\label{wxgridcelleditorpaintbackground}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{PaintBackground}{\param{const wxRect\& }{rectCell}, \param{wxGridCellAttr* }{attr}}
|
||||
|
||||
Draws the part of the cell not occupied by the control: the base class
|
||||
version just fills it with background colour from the attribute
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellEditor::BeginEdit}\label{wxgridcelleditorbeginedit}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{BeginEdit}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{wxGrid* }{grid}}
|
||||
|
||||
Fetch the value from the table and prepare the edit control
|
||||
to begin editing. Set the focus to the edit control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellEditor::EndEdit}\label{wxgridcelleditorendedit}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{EndEdit}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{wxGrid* }{grid}}
|
||||
|
||||
Complete the editing of the current cell. Returns true if the value has
|
||||
changed. If necessary, the control may be destroyed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellEditor::Reset}\label{wxgridcelleditorreset}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Reset}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Reset the value in the control back to its starting value
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellEditor::StartingKey}\label{wxgridcelleditorstartingkey}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{StartingKey}{\param{wxKeyEvent\& }{event}}
|
||||
|
||||
If the editor is enabled by pressing keys on the grid,
|
||||
this will be called to let the editor do something about
|
||||
that first key if desired.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellEditor::StartingClick}\label{wxgridcelleditorstartingclick}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{StartingClick}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
if the editor is enabled by clicking on the cell, this method will be
|
||||
called
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellEditor::HandleReturn}\label{wxgridcelleditorhandlereturn}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{HandleReturn}{\param{wxKeyEvent\& }{event}}
|
||||
|
||||
Some types of controls on some platforms may need some help
|
||||
with the Return key.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellEditor::Destroy}\label{wxgridcelleditordestroy}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Destroy}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Final cleanup
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellEditor::Clone}\label{wxgridcelleditorclone}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxGridCellEditor*}{Clone}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
create a new object which is the copy of this one
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellEditor::\destruct{wxGridCellEditor}}\label{wxgridcelleditordtor}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{\destruct{wxGridCellEditor}}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
the dtor is private because only DecRef() can delete us
|
||||
|
50
docs/latex/wx/gridrend.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
|
||||
%
|
||||
% automatically generated by HelpGen from
|
||||
% grid.h at 11/May/00 18:30:18
|
||||
%
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxGridCellRenderer}}\label{wxgridcellrenderer}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
suppress the stupid gcc warning about the class having private dtor and
|
||||
no friends
|
||||
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer: this class is responsible for actually drawing the cell
|
||||
in the grid. You may pass it to the wxGridCellAttr (below) to change the
|
||||
format of one given cell or to wxGrid::SetDefaultRenderer() to change the
|
||||
view of all cells. This is an ABC, you will normally use one of the
|
||||
predefined derived classes or derive your own class from it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxGridCellWorker}{wxgridcellworker}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Data structures}
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellRenderer::Draw}\label{wxgridcellrendererdraw}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Draw}{\param{wxGrid\& }{grid}, \param{wxGridCellAttr\& }{attr}, \param{wxDC\& }{dc}, \param{const wxRect\& }{rect}, \param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{isSelected}}
|
||||
|
||||
draw the given cell on the provided DC inside the given rectangle
|
||||
using the style specified by the attribute and the default or selected
|
||||
state corresponding to the isSelected value.
|
||||
this pure virtual function has a default implementation which will
|
||||
prepare the DC using the given attribute: it will draw the rectangle
|
||||
with the bg colour from attr and set the text colour and font
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellRenderer::GetBestSize}\label{wxgridcellrenderergetbestsize}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxSize}{GetBestSize}{\param{wxGrid\& }{grid}, \param{wxGridCellAttr\& }{attr}, \param{wxDC\& }{dc}, \param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}}
|
||||
|
||||
get the preferred size of the cell for its contents
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellRenderer::Clone}\label{wxgridcellrendererclone}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxGridCellRenderer*}{Clone}{
|
24
docs/latex/wx/gridsizr.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
|
||||
\section{\class{wxGridSizer}}\label{wxgridsizer}
|
||||
|
||||
A grid sizer is a sizer which lays out its children in a two-dimensional
|
||||
table with all table fields having the same size,
|
||||
i.e. the width of each field is the width of the widest child,
|
||||
the height of each field is the height of the tallest child.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxSizer}{wxsizer}\\
|
||||
\helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridSizer::wxGridSizer}\label{wxgridsizerwxgridsizer}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxGridSizer}{\param{int }{cols}, \param{int }{rows}, \param{int }{vgap}, \param{int }{hgap}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxGridSizer}{\param{int }{cols}, \param{int }{vgap = 0}, \param{int }{hgap = 0}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor for a wxGridSizer. {\it rows} and {\it cols} determine the number of
|
||||
columns and rows in the sizer - if either of the parameters is zero, it will be
|
||||
calculated to form the total number of children in the sizer, thus making the
|
||||
sizer grow dynamically. {\it vgap} and {\it hgap} define extra space between
|
||||
all children.
|
||||
|
236
docs/latex/wx/gridtbl.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,236 @@
|
||||
\section{\class{wxGridTableBase}}\label{wxgridtablebase}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Grid table classes
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Data structures}
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::wxGridTableBase}\label{wxgridtablebasewxgridtablebase}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxGridTableBase}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::\destruct{wxGridTableBase}}\label{wxgridtablebasedtor}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{\destruct{wxGridTableBase}}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::GetNumberRows}\label{wxgridtablebasegetnumberrows}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{int}{GetNumberRows}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
You must override these functions in a derived table class
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::GetNumberCols}\label{wxgridtablebasegetnumbercols}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{int}{GetNumberCols}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::IsEmptyCell}\label{wxgridtablebaseisemptycell}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{IsEmptyCell}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::GetValue}\label{wxgridtablebasegetvalue}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxString}{GetValue}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::SetValue}\label{wxgridtablebasesetvalue}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetValue}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{const wxString\& }{value}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::GetTypeName}\label{wxgridtablebasegettypename}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxString}{GetTypeName}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}}
|
||||
|
||||
Data type determination and value access
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::CanGetValueAs}\label{wxgridtablebasecangetvalueas}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{CanGetValueAs}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{const wxString\& }{typeName}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::CanSetValueAs}\label{wxgridtablebasecansetvalueas}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{CanSetValueAs}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{const wxString\& }{typeName}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::GetValueAsLong}\label{wxgridtablebasegetvalueaslong}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{long}{GetValueAsLong}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::GetValueAsDouble}\label{wxgridtablebasegetvalueasdouble}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{double}{GetValueAsDouble}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::GetValueAsBool}\label{wxgridtablebasegetvalueasbool}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{GetValueAsBool}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::SetValueAsLong}\label{wxgridtablebasesetvalueaslong}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetValueAsLong}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{long }{value}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::SetValueAsDouble}\label{wxgridtablebasesetvalueasdouble}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetValueAsDouble}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{double }{value}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::SetValueAsBool}\label{wxgridtablebasesetvalueasbool}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetValueAsBool}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{value}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::GetValueAsCustom}\label{wxgridtablebasegetvalueascustom}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void*}{GetValueAsCustom}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{const wxString\& }{typeName}}
|
||||
|
||||
For user defined types
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::SetValueAsCustom}\label{wxgridtablebasesetvalueascustom}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetValueAsCustom}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{const wxString\& }{typeName}, \param{void* }{value}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::SetView}\label{wxgridtablebasesetview}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetView}{\param{wxGrid* }{grid}}
|
||||
|
||||
Overriding these is optional
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::GetView}\label{wxgridtablebasegetview}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxGrid *}{GetView}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::Clear}\label{wxgridtablebaseclear}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Clear}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::InsertRows}\label{wxgridtablebaseinsertrows}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{InsertRows}{\param{size\_t }{pos = 0}, \param{size\_t }{numRows = 1}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::AppendRows}\label{wxgridtablebaseappendrows}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{AppendRows}{\param{size\_t }{numRows = 1}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::DeleteRows}\label{wxgridtablebasedeleterows}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{DeleteRows}{\param{size\_t }{pos = 0}, \param{size\_t }{numRows = 1}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::InsertCols}\label{wxgridtablebaseinsertcols}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{InsertCols}{\param{size\_t }{pos = 0}, \param{size\_t }{numCols = 1}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::AppendCols}\label{wxgridtablebaseappendcols}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{AppendCols}{\param{size\_t }{numCols = 1}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::DeleteCols}\label{wxgridtablebasedeletecols}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{DeleteCols}{\param{size\_t }{pos = 0}, \param{size\_t }{numCols = 1}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::GetRowLabelValue}\label{wxgridtablebasegetrowlabelvalue}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxString}{GetRowLabelValue}{\param{int }{row}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::GetColLabelValue}\label{wxgridtablebasegetcollabelvalue}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxString}{GetColLabelValue}{\param{int }{col}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::SetRowLabelValue}\label{wxgridtablebasesetrowlabelvalue}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetRowLabelValue}{\param{int }{WXUNUSED(row)}, \param{const }{wxString\&}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::SetColLabelValue}\label{wxgridtablebasesetcollabelvalue}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetColLabelValue}{\param{int }{WXUNUSED(col)}, \param{const }{wxString\&}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::SetAttrProvider}\label{wxgridtablebasesetattrprovider}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetAttrProvider}{\param{wxGridCellAttrProvider* }{attrProvider}}
|
||||
|
||||
Attribute handling
|
||||
give us the attr provider to use - we take ownership of the pointer
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::GetAttrProvider}\label{wxgridtablebasegetattrprovider}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxGridCellAttrProvider*}{GetAttrProvider}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
get the currently used attr provider (may be NULL)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::CanHaveAttributes}\label{wxgridtablebasecanhaveattributes}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{CanHaveAttributes}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Does this table allow attributes? Default implementation creates
|
||||
a wxGridCellAttrProvider if necessary.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::UpdateAttrRows}\label{wxgridtablebaseupdateattrrows}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{UpdateAttrRows}{\param{size\_t }{pos}, \param{int }{numRows}}
|
||||
|
||||
change row/col number in attribute if needed
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::UpdateAttrCols}\label{wxgridtablebaseupdateattrcols}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{UpdateAttrCols}{\param{size\_t }{pos}, \param{int }{numCols}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::GetAttr}\label{wxgridtablebasegetattr}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxGridCellAttr*}{GetAttr}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}}
|
||||
|
||||
by default forwarded to wxGridCellAttrProvider if any. May be
|
||||
overridden to handle attributes directly in the table.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::SetAttr}\label{wxgridtablebasesetattr}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetAttr}{\param{wxGridCellAttr* }{attr}, \param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}}
|
||||
|
||||
these functions take ownership of the pointer
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::SetRowAttr}\label{wxgridtablebasesetrowattr}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetRowAttr}{\param{wxGridCellAttr* }{attr}, \param{int }{row}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridTableBase::SetColAttr}\label{wxgridtablebasesetcolattr}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetColAttr}{\param{wxGridCellAttr* }{attr}, \param{int }{col}}
|
||||
|
59
docs/latex/wx/gridwork.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
%
|
||||
% automatically generated by HelpGen from
|
||||
% grid.h at 11/May/00 18:30:18
|
||||
%
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxGridCellWorker}}\label{wxgridcellworker}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxGridCellWorker: common base class for wxGridCellRenderer and
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor
|
||||
NB: this is more an implementation convenience than a design issue, so this
|
||||
class is not documented and is not public at all
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
No base class
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Data structures}
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellWorker::wxGridCellWorker}\label{wxgridcellworkerwxgridcellworker}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxGridCellWorker}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellWorker::IncRef}\label{wxgridcellworkerincref}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{IncRef}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
this class is ref counted: it is created with ref count of 1, so
|
||||
calling DecRef() once will delete it. Calling IncRef() allows to lock
|
||||
it until the matching DecRef() is called
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellWorker::DecRef}\label{wxgridcellworkerdecref}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{DecRef}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellWorker::SetParameters}\label{wxgridcellworkersetparameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetParameters}{\param{const wxString\& }{params}}
|
||||
|
||||
interpret renderer parameters: arbitrary string whose interpretatin is
|
||||
left to the derived classes
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxGridCellWorker::\destruct{wxGridCellWorker}}\label{wxgridcellworkerdtor}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{\destruct{wxGridCellWorker}}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
virtual dtor for any base class - private because only DecRef() can
|
||||
delete us
|
||||
|
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ is destroyed.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxObject *}{Get}{\param{long}{ key}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{wxObject *}{Get}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}}
|
||||
\func{wxObject *}{Get}{\param{const char*}{ key}}
|
||||
|
||||
Gets data from the hash table, using an integer or string key (depending on which
|
||||
has table constructor was used).
|
||||
@@ -121,13 +121,12 @@ description for \helpref{wxNode}{wxnode}. The user will probably only wish to us
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Put}{\param{long}{ key}, \param{wxObject *}{object}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Put}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{wxObject *}{object}}
|
||||
\func{void}{Put}{\param{const char*}{ key}, \param{wxObject *}{object}}
|
||||
|
||||
Inserts data into the hash table, using an integer or string key (depending on which
|
||||
has table constructor was used). The key string is copied and stored by the hash
|
||||
table implementation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxList::GetCount}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{size\_t}{GetCount}{\void}
|
||||
|
@@ -31,6 +31,8 @@ There are currently the following help controller classes defined:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\item wxWinHelpController, for controlling Windows Help.
|
||||
\item wxCHMHelpController, for controlling MS HTML Help. To use this, you need to set wxUSE\_MS\_HTML\_HELP
|
||||
to 0 in setup.h, and link your application with Microsoft's htmlhelp.lib. Currently VC++ only.
|
||||
\item wxExtHelpController, for controlling external browsers under Unix.
|
||||
The default browser is Netscape Navigator. The 'help' sample shows its use.
|
||||
\item wxHelpControllerHtml, using \helpref{wxHTML}{wxhtml} to display help. See {\tt wx/helpwxht.h} for
|
||||
@@ -51,6 +53,7 @@ wxHelpControllerBase\\
|
||||
<wx/help.h> (wxWindows chooses the appropriate help controller class)\\
|
||||
<wx/helpbase.h> (wxHelpControllerBase class)\\
|
||||
<wx/helpwin.h> (Windows Help controller)\\
|
||||
<wx/msw/helpchm.h> (MS HTML Help controller)\\
|
||||
<wx/generic/helpext.h> (external HTML browser controller)\\
|
||||
<wx/generic/helpwxht.h> (simple wxHTML-based help controller)\\
|
||||
<wx/html/helpctrl.h> (advanced wxHTML based help controller: wxHtmlHelpController)
|
||||
@@ -98,10 +101,14 @@ If the help viewer is not running, runs it and displays the file at the given bl
|
||||
|
||||
{\it WinHelp:} Refers to the context number.
|
||||
|
||||
{\it MS HTML Help:} Refers to the context number.
|
||||
|
||||
{\it External HTML help:} the same as for \helpref{wxHelpController::DisplaySection}{wxhelpcontrollerdisplaysection}.
|
||||
|
||||
{\it wxHtmlHelpController:} {\it sectionNo} is an identifier as specified in the {\tt .hhc} file. See \helpref{Help files format}{helpformat}.
|
||||
|
||||
This function is for backward compatibility only, and applications should use \helpref{wxHelpController}{wxhelpcontrollerdisplaysection} instead.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHelpController::DisplayContents}\label{wxhelpcontrollerdisplaycontents}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual bool}{DisplayContents}{\void}
|
||||
@@ -111,13 +118,23 @@ contents.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHelpController::DisplaySection}\label{wxhelpcontrollerdisplaysection}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual bool}{DisplaySection}{\param{const wxString\&}{ section}}
|
||||
|
||||
If the help viewer is not running, runs it and displays the given section.
|
||||
|
||||
The interpretation of {\it section} differs between help viewers. For most viewers,
|
||||
this call is equivalent to KeywordSearch. For MS HTML Help, external HTML help
|
||||
and simple wxHTML help, if {\it section} has a .htm
|
||||
or .html extension, that HTML file will be displayed; otherwise
|
||||
a keyword search is done.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual bool}{DisplaySection}{\param{int}{ sectionNo}}
|
||||
|
||||
If the help viewer is not running, runs it and displays the given section.
|
||||
|
||||
{\it WinHelp:} {\it sectionNo} is a context id.
|
||||
{\it WinHelp, MS HTML Help:} {\it sectionNo} is a context id.
|
||||
|
||||
{\it External HTML help/wxHTML based help:} wxExtHelpController and wxHelpControllerHtml implement {\it sectionNo} as an id in a map file, which is of the form:
|
||||
{\it External HTML help/simple wxHTML help:} wxExtHelpController and wxHelpControllerHtml implement {\it sectionNo} as an id in a map file, which is of the form:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
0 wx.html ; Index
|
||||
@@ -127,6 +144,8 @@ If the help viewer is not running, runs it and displays the given section.
|
||||
|
||||
{\it wxHtmlHelpController:} {\it sectionNo} is an identifier as specified in the {\tt .hhc} file. See \helpref{Help files format}{helpformat}.
|
||||
|
||||
See also the help sample for notes on how to specify section numbers for various help file formats.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHelpController::GetFrameParameters}\label{wxhelpcontrollergetframeparameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual wxFrame *}{GetFrameParameters}{\param{const wxSize * }{size = NULL}, \param{const wxPoint * }{pos = NULL},
|
||||
@@ -159,10 +178,10 @@ that the viewer is a variant of Netscape Navigator.}
|
||||
If the help viewer is not running, runs it, and searches for sections matching the given keyword. If one
|
||||
match is found, the file is displayed at this section.
|
||||
|
||||
{\it WinHelp:} If more than one match is found,
|
||||
{\it WinHelp, MS HTML Help:} If more than one match is found,
|
||||
the first topic is displayed.
|
||||
|
||||
{\it External HTML help:} If more than one match is found,
|
||||
{\it External HTML help, simple wxHTML help:} If more than one match is found,
|
||||
a choice of topics is displayed.
|
||||
|
||||
{\it wxHtmlHelpController:} see \helpref{wxHtmlHelpController::KeywordSearch}{wxhtmlhelpcontrollerkeywordsearch}.
|
||||
|
@@ -41,15 +41,24 @@ Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::PreviewFile}\label{wxhtmleasyprintingpreviewfile}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{PreviewFile}{\param{const wxString\& }{htmlfile}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{PreviewFile}{\param{const wxString\& }{htmlfile}}
|
||||
|
||||
Preview HTML file.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns FALSE in case of error -- call
|
||||
\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
|
||||
information about the kind of the error.
|
||||
|
||||
Previews HTML file.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::PreviewText}\label{wxhtmleasyprintingpreviewtext}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{PreviewText}{\param{const wxString\& }{htmltext}, \param{const wxString\& }{basepath = wxEmptyString}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{PreviewText}{\param{const wxString\& }{htmltext}, \param{const wxString\& }{basepath = wxEmptyString}}
|
||||
|
||||
Previews HTML text (not file!).
|
||||
Preview HTML text (not file!).
|
||||
|
||||
Returns FALSE in case of error -- call
|
||||
\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
|
||||
information about the kind of the error.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -60,15 +69,23 @@ file). It is used to determine path for loading images, for example.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::PrintFile}\label{wxhtmleasyprintingprintfile}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{PrintFile}{\param{const wxString\& }{htmlfile}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{PrintFile}{\param{const wxString\& }{htmlfile}}
|
||||
|
||||
Prints HTML file.
|
||||
Print HTML file.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns FALSE in case of error -- call
|
||||
\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
|
||||
information about the kind of the error.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::PrintText}\label{wxhtmleasyprintingprinttext}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{PrintText}{\param{const wxString\& }{htmltext}, \param{const wxString\& }{basepath = wxEmptyString}}
|
||||
\func{bool}{PrintText}{\param{const wxString\& }{htmltext}, \param{const wxString\& }{basepath = wxEmptyString}}
|
||||
|
||||
Prints HTML text (not file!).
|
||||
Print HTML text (not file!).
|
||||
|
||||
Returns FALSE in case of error -- call
|
||||
\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
|
||||
information about the kind of the error.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -81,19 +98,19 @@ file). It is used to determine path for loading images, for example.}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{PrinterSetup}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Displays printer setup dialog and allows the user to modify settings.
|
||||
Display printer setup dialog and allows the user to modify settings.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::PageSetup}\label{wxhtmleasyprintingpagesetup}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{PageSetup}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Displays page setup dialog and allows the user to modify settings.
|
||||
Display page setup dialog and allows the user to modify settings.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlEasyPrinting::SetHeader}\label{wxhtmleasyprintingsetheader}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetHeader}{\param{const wxString\& }{header}, \param{int }{pg = wxPAGE\_ALL}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets page header.
|
||||
Set page header.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -111,7 +128,7 @@ Sets page header.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetFooter}{\param{const wxString\& }{footer}, \param{int }{pg = wxPAGE\_ALL}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets page footer.
|
||||
Set page footer.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -61,6 +61,7 @@ Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_TOOLBAR}}{Help frame has toolbar.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_FLATTOOLBAR}}{Help frame has toolbar with flat buttons (aka coolbar).}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_CONTENTS}}{Help frame has contents panel.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_INDEX}}{Help frame has index panel.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_SEARCH}}{Help frame has search panel.}
|
||||
@@ -89,7 +90,7 @@ If {\it show\_wait\_msg} is TRUE then a decorationless window with progress mess
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual wxHtmlHelpFrame*}{CreateHelpFrame}{\param{wxHtmlHelpData * }{data}}
|
||||
|
||||
This protected virtual method may be overriden so that the controller
|
||||
This protected virtual method may be overridden so that the controller
|
||||
uses slightly different frame. See {\it samples/html/helpview} sample for
|
||||
an example.
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlHelpController::Display}\label{wxhtmlhelpcontrollerdisplay}
|
||||
@@ -144,7 +145,7 @@ Displays help window and focuses index panel.
|
||||
Displays help window, focuses search panel and starts searching.
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the keyword was found.
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf Important:} KeywordSearch searches only pages listed in .htc file(s).
|
||||
{\bf Important:} KeywordSearch searches only pages listed in .hhc file(s).
|
||||
You should list all pages in the contents file.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlHelpController::ReadCustomization}\label{wxhtmlhelpcontrollerreadcustomization}
|
||||
|
@@ -32,6 +32,7 @@ Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_TOOLBAR}}{Help frame has toolbar.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_FLATTOOLBAR}}{Help frame has toolbar with flat buttons (aka coolbar).}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_CONTENTS}}{Help frame has contents panel.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_INDEX}}{Help frame has index panel.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_SEARCH}}{Help frame has search panel.}
|
||||
@@ -50,9 +51,13 @@ Creates the frame.
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_TOOLBAR}}{Help frame has toolbar.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_FLATTOOLBAR}}{Help frame has toolbar with flat buttons (aka coolbar).}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_CONTENTS}}{Help frame has contents panel.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_INDEX}}{Help frame has index panel.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_SEARCH}}{Help frame has search panel.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_BOOKMARKS}}{Help frame has bookmarks controls.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_OPENFILES}}{Allow user to open arbitrary HTML document.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxHF\_PRINT}}{Toolbar contains "print" button.}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::CreateContents}\label{wxhtmlhelpframecreatecontents}
|
||||
|
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ This image shows you cells and containers:
|
||||
\wxheading{Using Containers in Tag Handler}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxHtmlWinParser}{wxhtmlwinparser} provides a user-friendly way
|
||||
of managing containers. It's based on the idea of opening and closing containers.
|
||||
of managing containers. It is based on the idea of opening and closing containers.
|
||||
|
||||
Use \helpref{OpenContainer}{wxhtmlwinparseropencontainer} to open new
|
||||
a container {\it within an already opened container}. This new container is a
|
||||
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ See explanation:
|
||||
|
||||
\helponly{\image{}{cont.bmp}}
|
||||
\end{comment}
|
||||
It's clear there must be same number of calls to
|
||||
It is clear there must be same number of calls to
|
||||
OpenContainer as to CloseContainer...
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Example}
|
||||
|
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ the structure of macros. See macros reference:
|
||||
Starts handler definition. {\it name} is handler identifier (in fact
|
||||
part of class name), {\it tags} is string containing list of tags
|
||||
supported by this handler (in uppercase). This macro derives new class from
|
||||
wxHtmlWinTagHandler and implements it's
|
||||
wxHtmlWinTagHandler and implements it is
|
||||
\helpref{GetSupportedTags}{wxhtmltaghandlergetsupportedtags} method.
|
||||
|
||||
Example: TAG\_HANDLER\_BEGIN(FONTS, "B,I,U,T")
|
||||
|
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ your tex2rtf.ini file.
|
||||
|
||||
(See \helpref{wxHtmlHelpController}{wxhtmlhelpcontroller} for help controller description.)
|
||||
|
||||
A {\bf book} consists of three files : header file, contents file and index file.
|
||||
A {\bf book} consists of three files: header file, contents file and index file.
|
||||
You can make a regular zip archive of these files, plus the HTML and any image files,
|
||||
for wxHTML (or helpview) to read; and the .zip file can optionally be renamed to .htb.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ passed {\bf string}. See the example:
|
||||
mywin -> LoadPage("test.htm");
|
||||
mywin -> SetPage("<html><body>"
|
||||
"<h1>Error</h1>"
|
||||
"Some error occured :-H)"
|
||||
"Some error occurred :-H)"
|
||||
"</body></hmtl>");
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ See the example:
|
||||
html -> SetRelatedStatusBar(0);
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
The first command associates html object with it's parent frame
|
||||
The first command associates html object with it is parent frame
|
||||
(this points to wxFrame object there) and sets format of title.
|
||||
Page title "Hello, world!" will be displayed as "HTML : Hello, world!"
|
||||
in this example.
|
||||
|
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ This must be called after DoParsing().
|
||||
\constfunc{wxFileSystem*}{GetFS}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns pointer to the file system. Because each tag handler has
|
||||
reference to it's parent parser it can easily request the file by
|
||||
reference to it is parent parser it can easily request the file by
|
||||
calling
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Returns pointer to the source being parsed.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual void}{InitParser}{\param{const wxString\& }{source}}
|
||||
|
||||
Setups the parser for parsing the {\it source} string. (Should be overriden
|
||||
Setups the parser for parsing the {\it source} string. (Should be overridden
|
||||
in derived class)
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlParser::Parse}\label{wxhtmlparserparse}
|
||||
@@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ It is obvious that you cannot use only one tag handler for <param> tag.
|
||||
Instead you must use context-sensitive handlers for <param> inside <myitems>
|
||||
and <param> inside <execute>.
|
||||
|
||||
This is the prefered solution:
|
||||
This is the preferred solution:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
TAG_HANDLER_BEGIN(MYITEM, "MYITEMS")
|
||||
|
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ wxObject
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxHtmlTag}{\param{const wxString\& }{source}, \param{int }{pos}, \param{int }{end\_pos}, \param{wxHtmlTagsCache* }{cache}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor. You'll probably never have to construct a wxHtmlTag object
|
||||
Constructor. You will probably never have to construct a wxHtmlTag object
|
||||
yourself. Feel free to ignore the constructor parameters.
|
||||
Have a look at lib/htmlparser.cpp if you're interested in creating it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ tag handlers. It is used almost exclusively together with set of
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual void}{FillHandlersTable}{\param{wxHtmlWinParser }{*parser}}
|
||||
|
||||
You must override this method. In most common case it's body consists
|
||||
You must override this method. In most common case it is body consists
|
||||
only of lines of following type:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
|
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{wnd}{Connected window. It's parent window {\bf must} be the wxHtmlWindow object within
|
||||
\docparam{wnd}{Connected window. It is parent window {\bf must} be the wxHtmlWindow object within
|
||||
which it is displayed!}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{w}{Floating width. If non-zero width of {\it wnd} window is adjusted so that it is
|
||||
|
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ htmlwin -> SetPage("help/myproject/index.htm");
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
FALSE if an error occured, TRUE otherwise
|
||||
FALSE if an error occurred, TRUE otherwise
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::OnLinkClicked}\label{wxhtmlwindowonlinkclicked}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ If you want to load a document from some location use
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
FALSE if an error occured, TRUE otherwise.
|
||||
FALSE if an error occurred, TRUE otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::SetRelatedFrame}\label{wxhtmlwindowsetrelatedframe}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Returns default horizontal alignment.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{int}{GetCharHeight}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns (average) char height in standard font. It's used as DC-independent metrics.
|
||||
Returns (average) char height in standard font. It is used as DC-independent metrics.
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf Note:} This function doesn't return the {\it actual} height. If you want to
|
||||
know the height of the current font, call {\tt GetDC -> GetCharHeight()}.
|
||||
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ know the height of the current font, call {\tt GetDC -> GetCharHeight()}.
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{int}{GetCharWidth}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns average char width in standard font. It's used as DC-independent metrics.
|
||||
Returns average char width in standard font. It is used as DC-independent metrics.
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf Note:} This function doesn't return the {\it actual} width. If you want to
|
||||
know the height of the current font, call {\tt GetDC -> GetCharWidth()}
|
||||
|
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
|
||||
\section{wxWindows "Hello World"}\label{helloworld}
|
||||
|
||||
As many people have requested a mini-sample to be published here
|
||||
so that some quick judgements concerning syntax
|
||||
so that some quick judgments concerning syntax
|
||||
and basic principles can be made, you can now look at wxWindows'
|
||||
"Hello World":
|
||||
|
||||
You have to include wxWindows's header files, of course. This can
|
||||
You have to include wxWindows' header files, of course. This can
|
||||
be done on a file by file basis (such as \#include "wx/window.h")
|
||||
or using one global include (\#include "wx/wx.h"). This is
|
||||
also useful on platforms which support precompiled headers such
|
||||
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ enum
|
||||
};
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
We then procede to actually implement an event table in which the events
|
||||
We then proceed to actually implement an event table in which the events
|
||||
are routed to their respective handler functions in the class MyFrame.
|
||||
There are predefined macros for routing all common events, ranging from
|
||||
the selection of a list box entry to a resize event when a user resizes
|
||||
@@ -101,11 +101,11 @@ using this macro, which creates an application instance and starts the program.
|
||||
IMPLEMENT_APP(MyApp)
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
As mentionend above, wxApp::OnInit() is called upon startup and should be
|
||||
As mentioned above, wxApp::OnInit() is called upon startup and should be
|
||||
used to initialize the program, maybe showing a "splash screen" and creating
|
||||
the main window (or several). The frame should get a title bar text ("Hello World")
|
||||
and a position and start-up size. One frame can also be declared to be the
|
||||
top window. Returning TRUE indicates a successful intialization.
|
||||
top window. Returning TRUE indicates a successful initialization.
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
bool MyApp::OnInit()
|
||||
@@ -142,9 +142,9 @@ MyFrame::MyFrame(const wxString& title, const wxPoint& pos, const wxSize& size)
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
Here are the actual event handlers. MyFrame::OnQuit() closes the main window
|
||||
by calling Close(). The paramter TRUE indicates that other windows have no veto
|
||||
by calling Close(). The parameter TRUE indicates that other windows have no veto
|
||||
power such as after asking "Do you really want to close?". If there is no other
|
||||
main window left, the applicatin will quit.
|
||||
main window left, the application will quit.
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
void MyFrame::OnQuit(wxCommandEvent& WXUNUSED(event))
|
||||
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ case a typical "About" window with information about the program.
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
void MyFrame::OnAbout(wxCommandEvent& WXUNUSED(event))
|
||||
{
|
||||
wxMessageBox( "This is a wxWindows's Hello world sample",
|
||||
wxMessageBox( "This is a wxWindows' Hello world sample",
|
||||
"About Hello World", wxOK | wxICON_INFORMATION );
|
||||
}
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ handler with \helpref{wxImage::AddHandler}{wximageaddhandler} or
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf \indexit{wxGIFHandler}}}{Only for loading, due to legal issues.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf \indexit{wxPCXHandler}}}{For loading and saving (see below).}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf \indexit{wxPNMHandler}}}{For loading and saving (see below).}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf \indexit{wxTIFFHandler}}}{For loading and saving.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf \indexit{wxTIFFHandler}}}{For loading.}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
||||
When saving in PCX format, {\bf wxPCXHandler} will count the number of
|
||||
@@ -74,6 +74,13 @@ and forth without loss in that respect.
|
||||
|
||||
Creates an image with the given width and height.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxImage}{\param{int}{ width}, \param{int}{ height}, \param{unsigned char*}{ data}, \param{bool}{ static_data=FALSE}}
|
||||
|
||||
Creates an image from given data with the given width and height. If
|
||||
{\it static_data} is TRUE, then wxImage will not delete the actual
|
||||
image data in its destructor, otherwise it will free it by calling
|
||||
{\it free()}.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxImage}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{long}{ type = wxBITMAP\_TYPE\_ANY}}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxImage}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{const wxString\&}{ mimetype}}
|
||||
@@ -180,6 +187,16 @@ on program start-up to look up colors. This ensures a very fast conversion, but
|
||||
the image quality won't be perfect (and could be better for photo images using more
|
||||
sophisticated dithering algorithms).
|
||||
|
||||
On Windows, if there is a palette present (set with SetPalette), it will be used when
|
||||
creating the wxBitmap (most useful in 8-bit display mode). On other platforms,
|
||||
the palette is currently ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::Copy}\label{wximagecopy}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxImage}{Copy}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns an identical copy of the image.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::Create}\label{wximagecreate}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Create}{\param{int}{ width}, \param{int}{ height}}
|
||||
@@ -296,6 +313,15 @@ Gets the green value of the mask colour.
|
||||
|
||||
Gets the red value of the mask colour.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::GetPalette}\label{wximagegetpalette}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxPalette\&}{GetPalette}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the palette associated with the image. Currently the palette is only
|
||||
used in ConvertToBitmap under Windows.
|
||||
|
||||
Eventually wxImage handlers will set the palette if one exists in the image file.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::GetSubImage}\label{wximagegetsubimage}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxImage}{GetSubImage}{\param{const wxRect\&}{ rect}}
|
||||
@@ -458,7 +484,6 @@ Saves a image in the given stream.
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxBITMAP\_TYPE\_PNG}}{Save a PNG image file.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxBITMAP\_TYPE\_PCX}}{Save a PCX image file (tries to save as 8-bit if possible, falls back to 24-bit otherwise).}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxBITMAP\_TYPE\_PNM}}{Save a PNM image file (as raw RGB always).}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxBITMAP\_TYPE\_TIF}}{Save a TIFF image file.}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{mimetype}{MIME type.}
|
||||
@@ -485,6 +510,13 @@ mimetype to the named file}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::Mirror}\label{wximagemirror}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxImage}{Mirror}{\param{bool}{ horizontally = TRUE}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a mirrored copy of the image. The parameter {\it horizontally}
|
||||
indicates the orientation.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::Replace}\label{wximagereplace}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{Replace}{\param{unsigned char}{ r1}, \param{unsigned char}{ g1}, \param{unsigned char}{ b1},
|
||||
@@ -517,6 +549,13 @@ rotated image background. Else, black (rgb 0, 0, 0) will be used.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the rotated image, leaving this image intact.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::Rotate90}\label{wximagerotate90}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxImage}{Rotate90}{\param{bool}{ clockwise = TRUE}}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a copy of the image rotated 90 degrees in the direction
|
||||
indicated by {\it clockwise}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::Scale}\label{wximagescale}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{wxImage}{Scale}{\param{int}{ width}, \param{int}{ height}}
|
||||
@@ -526,7 +565,7 @@ scaling bitmaps in general as the only other way to scale bitmaps
|
||||
is to blit a wxMemoryDC into another wxMemoryDC.
|
||||
|
||||
It may be mentioned that the GTK port uses this function internally
|
||||
to scale bitmaps when using mapping mode in wxDC.
|
||||
to scale bitmaps when using mapping modes in wxDC.
|
||||
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -571,9 +610,15 @@ Specifies whether there is a mask or not. The area of the mask is determined by
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the mask colour for this image (and tells the image to use the mask).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::SetPalette}\label{wximagesetpalette}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetPalette}{\param{const wxPalette\&}{ palette}}
|
||||
|
||||
Associates a palette with the image. Currently, the palette is not used.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImage::SetRGB}\label{wximagesetrgb}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetRGB}{\param{int }{x}, \param{int }{y}, \param{unsigned char }{red}, \param{unsigned char }{blue}, \param{unsigned char }{green}}
|
||||
\func{void}{SetRGB}{\param{int }{x}, \param{int }{y}, \param{unsigned char }{red}, \param{unsigned char }{green}, \param{unsigned char }{blue}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the pixel at the given coordinate. This routine performs bounds-checks
|
||||
for the coordinate so it can be considered a safe way to manipulate the
|
||||
@@ -779,6 +824,16 @@ Sets the handler extension.
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{extension}{Handler extension.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImageHandler::SetMimeType}\label{wximagehandlersetmimetype}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetMimeType}{\param{const wxString\& }{mimetype}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the handler MIME type.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{mimename}{Handler MIME type.}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImageHandler::SetType}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetType}{\param{long }{type}}
|
||||
@@ -789,14 +844,3 @@ Sets the handler type.
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{name}{Handler type.}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImageHandler::SetMimeType}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{void}{SetMimeType}{\param{const wxString\& }{mimetype}}
|
||||
|
||||
Sets the handler MIME type.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{mimename}{Handler MIME type.}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -131,6 +131,26 @@ that the background is solid.}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the number of images in the list.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImageList::GetSize}\label{wximagelistgetsize}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{GetSize}{\param{int }{index}, \param{int\& }{width}, \param{int \&}{height}}
|
||||
|
||||
Retrieves the size of the images in the list. Currently, the {\it index}
|
||||
parameter is ignored as all images in the list have the same size.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Parameters}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{index}{currently unused, should be 0}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{width}{receives the width of the images in the list}
|
||||
|
||||
\docparam{height}{receives the height of the images in the list}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if the function succeeded, FALSE if it failed (for example, if the image
|
||||
list was not yet initialized).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxImageList::Remove}\label{wximagelistremove}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Remove}{\param{int}{ index}}
|
||||
|
@@ -93,6 +93,14 @@ Returns TRUE if the Alt key was down at the time of the key event.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the control key was down at the time of the key event.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxKeyEvent::GetKeyCode}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{int}{GetKeyCode}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the virtual key code. ASCII events return normal ASCII values,
|
||||
while non-ASCII events return values such as {\bf WXK\_LEFT} for the
|
||||
left cursor key. See \helpref{Keycodes}{keycodes} for a full list of the virtual key codes.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxKeyEvent::GetX}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{long}{GetX}{\void}
|
||||
@@ -105,14 +113,6 @@ Returns the X position of the event.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the Y position of the event.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxKeyEvent::KeyCode}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{long}{KeyCode}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the virtual key code. ASCII events return normal ASCII values,
|
||||
while non-ASCII events return values such as {\bf WXK\_LEFT} for the
|
||||
left cursor key. See \helpref{Keycodes}{keycodes} for a full list of the virtual key codes.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxKeyEvent::MetaDown}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{MetaDown}{\void}
|
||||
@@ -127,6 +127,14 @@ Returns TRUE if the Meta key was down at the time of the key event.
|
||||
|
||||
Obtains the position at which the key was pressed.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxKeyEvent::HasModifiers}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{HasModifiers}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if either of {\sc Ctrl}, {\sc Alt} or {\sc Meta} keys was down
|
||||
at the time of the key event. Note that this function does not take into
|
||||
account the {\sc Shift} key state.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxKeyEvent::ShiftDown}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{ShiftDown}{\void}
|
||||
|
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ data but make all of its dangerous (because untyped) functions protected, so
|
||||
that they can only be used from derived classes which, in turn, expose a type
|
||||
safe interface. With this approach a new wxList-like class must be defined for
|
||||
each list type (i.e. list of ints, of wxStrings or of MyObjects). This is done
|
||||
with {\it WX\_DECLARE\_LIST} and {\it WX\_IMPLEMENT\_LIST} macros like this
|
||||
with {\it WX\_DECLARE\_LIST} and {\it WX\_DEFINE\_LIST} macros like this
|
||||
(notice the similarity with WX\_DECLARE\_OBJARRAY and WX\_IMPLEMENT\_OBJARRAY
|
||||
macros):
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -51,8 +51,8 @@ macros):
|
||||
// also have MyList::Node type which is the type-safe version of wxNode.
|
||||
MyList list;
|
||||
MyListElement element;
|
||||
list.Add(element); // ok
|
||||
list.Add(17); // error: incorrect type
|
||||
list.Append(element); // ok
|
||||
list.Append(17); // error: incorrect type
|
||||
|
||||
// let's iterate over the list
|
||||
for ( MyList::Node *node = list.GetFirst(); node; node = node->GetNext() )
|
||||
|
@@ -187,18 +187,21 @@ Ensures this item is visible.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{long}{FindItem}{\param{long }{start}, \param{const wxString\& }{str}, \param{const bool }{partial = FALSE}}
|
||||
|
||||
Find an item whose label matches this string, starting from the item after {\it start} or
|
||||
the beginning if {\it start} is -1.
|
||||
Find an item whose label matches this string, starting from the item
|
||||
{\it start}.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{long}{FindItem}{\param{long }{start}, \param{long }{data}}
|
||||
|
||||
Find an item whose data matches this data, starting from the item after {\it start} or
|
||||
the beginning if 'start' is -1.
|
||||
Find an item whose data matches this data, starting from the item {\it start}.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{long}{FindItem}{\param{long }{start}, \param{const wxPoint\& }{pt}, \param{int }{direction}}
|
||||
|
||||
Find an item nearest this position in the specified direction, starting from
|
||||
the item after {\it start} or the beginning if {\it start} is -1.
|
||||
the item {\it start}.
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf NB:} The meaning of parameters {\it start} has changed in wxMSW
|
||||
version 2.2.0, previously the item with this index was excluded from the
|
||||
search but it is included now.
|
||||
|
||||
\pythonnote{In place of a single overloaded method name, wxPython
|
||||
implements the following methods:\par
|
||||
@@ -261,8 +264,8 @@ You must call {\it info.SetId()} to se ID of item you're interested in
|
||||
before calling this method.
|
||||
|
||||
\pythonnote{The wxPython version of this method takes an integer parameter
|
||||
for the item ID, and returns the wxListItem object.
|
||||
}
|
||||
for the item ID, an optional integer for the column number, and
|
||||
returns the wxListItem object. }
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxListCtrl::GetItemData}\label{wxlistctrlgetitemdata}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -48,45 +48,76 @@ functions that take a wxListEvent argument.
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::m\_code}
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::GetCode}\label{wxlisteventgetcode}
|
||||
|
||||
\member{int}{m\_code}
|
||||
\constfunc{int}{GetCode}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Key code if the event is a keypress event.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::m\_itemIndex}
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::GetIndex}\label{wxlisteventgetindex}
|
||||
|
||||
\member{long}{m\_itemIndex}
|
||||
\constfunc{long}{GetIndex}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
The item index.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::m\_oldItemIndex}
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::GetOldIndex}\label{wxlisteventgetoldindex}
|
||||
|
||||
\member{long}{m\_oldItemIndex}
|
||||
\constfunc{long}{GetOldIndex}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
The old item index.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::m\_col}
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::GetColumn}\label{wxlisteventgetcolumn}
|
||||
|
||||
\member{int}{m\_col}
|
||||
\constfunc{int}{GetColumn}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
The column position.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::m\_cancelled}
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::Cancelled}\label{wxlisteventcancelled}
|
||||
|
||||
\member{bool}{m\_cancelled}
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{Cancelled}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE if this event is an end edit event and the user cancelled the edit.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::m\_pointDrag}
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::GetPoint}\label{wxlisteventgetpoint}
|
||||
|
||||
\member{wxPoint}{m\_pointDrag}
|
||||
\constfunc{wxPoint}{GetPoint}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
The position of the mouse pointer if the event is a drag event.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::m\_item}
|
||||
|
||||
\member{wxListItem}{m\_item}
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::GetLabel}\label{wxlisteventgetlabel}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxString\&}{GetLabel}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
The label.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::GetText}\label{wxlisteventgettext}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxString\&}{GetText}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
The text.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::GetImage}\label{wxlisteventgetimage}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{int}{GetImage}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
The image.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::GetData}\label{wxlisteventgetdata}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{long}{GetData}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
The data.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::GetMask}\label{wxlisteventgetmask}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{long}{GetMask}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
The mask.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxListEvent::GetItem}\label{wxlisteventgetitem}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxListItem\&}{GetItem}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
An item object, used by some events. See also \helpref{wxListCtrl::SetItem}{wxlistctrlsetitem}.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -51,7 +51,11 @@ understand: first of all, the application locale is changed - note that this
|
||||
will affect many of standard C library functions such as printf() or strftime().
|
||||
Second, this wxLocale object becomes the new current global locale for the
|
||||
application and so all subsequent calls to wxGetTranslation() will try to
|
||||
translate the messages using the message catalogs for this locale.
|
||||
translate the messages using the message catalogs for this locale. Finally,
|
||||
unless bLoadDefault parameter is FALSE, the method also loads the wxstd.mo
|
||||
catalog (which is looked for in all the usual places and, additionally, under
|
||||
the location specified bythe environment variable WXDIR if it is set) which
|
||||
will allow to translate all the messages generated by the library itself.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxLocale::\destruct{wxLocale}}\label{wxlocaledtor}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -61,18 +65,11 @@ The destructor, like the constructor, also has global side effects: the previous
|
||||
set locale is restored and so the changes described in
|
||||
\helpref{Init}{wxlocaleinit} documentation are rolled back.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxLocale::GetLocale}\label{wxlocalegetlocale}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const char*}{GetLocale}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the locale name as passed to the constructor or
|
||||
\helpref{Init()}{wxlocaleinit}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxLocale::AddCatalog}\label{wxlocaleaddcatalog}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{AddCatalog}{\param{const char }{*szDomain}}
|
||||
|
||||
Add a catalog for use with the current locale: it's searched for in standard
|
||||
Add a catalog for use with the current locale: it is searched for in standard
|
||||
places (current directory first, then the system one), but you may also prepend
|
||||
additional directories to the search path with
|
||||
\helpref{AddCatalogLookupPathPrefix()}{wxlocaleaddcataloglookuppathprefix}.
|
||||
@@ -93,6 +90,36 @@ looked up under prefix/<lang>/LC\_MESSAGES, prefix/LC\_MESSAGES and prefix
|
||||
|
||||
This only applies to subsequent invocations of AddCatalog()!
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxLocale::GetLocale}\label{wxlocalegetlocale}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const char*}{GetLocale}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the locale name as passed to the constructor or
|
||||
\helpref{Init()}{wxlocaleinit}.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxLocale::GetName}\label{wxlocalegetname}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxString\&}{GetName}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the current short name for the locale (as given to the constructor or
|
||||
the Init() function).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxLocale::GetString}\label{wxlocalegetstring}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const char*}{GetString}{\param{const char }{*szOrigString}, \param{const char }{*szDomain = NULL}}
|
||||
|
||||
Retrieves the translation for a string in all loaded domains unless the szDomain
|
||||
parameter is specified (and then only this catalog/domain is searched).
|
||||
|
||||
Returns original string if translation is not available
|
||||
(in this case an error message is generated the first time
|
||||
a string is not found; use \helpref{wxLogNull}{wxlogoverview} to suppress it).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
Domains are searched in the last to first order, i.e. catalogs
|
||||
added later override those added before.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxLocale::Init}\label{wxlocaleinit}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{bool}{Init}{\param{const char }{*szName}, \param{const char }{*szShort = NULL}, \param{const char }{*szLocale = NULL}, \param{bool }{bLoadDefault = TRUE}}
|
||||
@@ -129,26 +156,9 @@ normally corresponds to 'domain' which is more or less the application name.
|
||||
|
||||
See also: \helpref{AddCatalog}{wxlocaleaddcatalog}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxLocale::GetName}\label{wxlocalegetname}
|
||||
\membersection{wxLocale::IsOk}\label{wxlocaleisok}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxString\&}{GetName}{\void}
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{IsOk}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the current short name for the locale (as given to the constructor or
|
||||
the Init() function).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxLocale::GetString}\label{wxlocalegetstring}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const char*}{GetString}{\param{const char }{*szOrigString}, \param{const char }{*szDomain = NULL}}
|
||||
|
||||
Retrieves the translation for a string in all loaded domains unless the szDomain
|
||||
parameter is specified (and then only this catalog/domain is searched).
|
||||
|
||||
Returns original string if translation is not available
|
||||
(in this case an error message is generated the first time
|
||||
a string is not found; use \helpref{wxLogNull}{wxlogoverview} to suppress it).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
Domains are searched in the last to first order, i.e. catalogs
|
||||
added later override those added before.
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the locale could be set successfully.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
|
||||
%% Created: 07.03.00
|
||||
%% RCS-ID: $Id$
|
||||
%% Copyright: (c) Vadim Zeitlin
|
||||
%% Licence: wxWindows licence
|
||||
%% License: wxWindows license
|
||||
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxLongLong}}\label{wxlonglong}
|
||||
|
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
|
||||
\documentstyle[a4,11pt,makeidx,verbatim,texhelp,fancyheadings,palatino]{report}
|
||||
% JACS: doesn't make it through Tex2RTF, sorry. I'll put it into texhelp.sty
|
||||
% JACS: doesn't make it through Tex2RTF, sorry. I will put it into texhelp.sty
|
||||
% since Tex2RTF doesn't parse it.
|
||||
% BTW, style MUST be report for it to work for Tex2RTF.
|
||||
%KB:
|
||||
@@ -25,13 +25,13 @@
|
||||
%\special{!/@scaleunit 1 def}
|
||||
\parskip=10pt
|
||||
\parindent=0pt
|
||||
\title{wxWindows 2.1.14: A portable C++ and Python GUI toolkit}
|
||||
\title{wxWindows 2.2: A portable C++ and Python GUI toolkit}
|
||||
\winhelponly{\author{by Julian Smart et al
|
||||
%\winhelponly{\\$$\image{1cm;0cm}{wxwin.wmf}$$}
|
||||
}}
|
||||
\winhelpignore{\author{Julian Smart, Robert Roebling, Vadim Zeitlin,
|
||||
Robin Dunn, et al}
|
||||
\date{March 19th 2000}
|
||||
\date{December 2001}
|
||||
}
|
||||
\makeindex
|
||||
\begin{document}
|
||||
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ members of the wxWindows team\\
|
||||
Portions (c) 1996 Artificial Intelligence Applications Institute\\
|
||||
\end{center}
|
||||
|
||||
Please also see the wxWindows licence files (preamble.txt, lgpl.txt, gpl.txt, licence.txt,
|
||||
Please also see the wxWindows license files (preamble.txt, lgpl.txt, gpl.txt, license.txt,
|
||||
licendoc.txt) for conditions of software and documentation use.
|
||||
|
||||
\section*{wxWindows Library License, Version 3}
|
||||
|
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
|
||||
\section{\class{wxMask}}\label{wxmask}
|
||||
|
||||
This class encapsulates a monochrome mask bitmap, where the masked area is black and
|
||||
the unmasked area is white.
|
||||
the unmasked area is white. When associated with a bitmap and drawn in a device context,
|
||||
the unmasked area of the bitmap will be drawn, and the masked area will not be drawn.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
|
49
docs/latex/wx/mbcnvfil.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
|
||||
%
|
||||
% automatically generated by HelpGen from
|
||||
% ../include/wx/strconv.h at 25/Mar/00 10:20:56
|
||||
%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxMBConvFile}}\label{wxmbconvfile}
|
||||
|
||||
This class converts file names between filesystem multibyte encoding and
|
||||
Unicode. It has one predefined instance, {\bf wxConvFile}.
|
||||
Since some platforms (e.g. Win32) use Unicode in the filenames,
|
||||
and others (e.g. Unix) use multibyte encodings, this class should only
|
||||
be used directly if wxMBFILES is defined to 1. A convenience macro,
|
||||
wxFNCONV, is defined to wxConvFile.cWX2MB in this case. You could use it
|
||||
like this:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
wxChar *name = wxT("rawfile.doc");
|
||||
FILE *fil = fopen(wxFNCONV(name), "r");
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
(although it would be better to use wxFopen(name, wxT("r")) in this case.)
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxMBConv}{wxmbconv}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/strconv.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxMBConv classes overview}{mbconvclasses}
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMBConvFile::MB2WC}\label{wxmbconvfilemb2wc}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{size\_t}{MB2WC}{\param{wchar\_t* }{buf}, \param{const char* }{psz}, \param{size\_t }{n}}
|
||||
|
||||
Converts from multibyte filename encoding to Unicode. Returns the size of the destination buffer.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMBConvFile::WC2MB}\label{wxmbconvfilewc2mb}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{size\_t}{WC2MB}{\param{char* }{buf}, \param{const wchar\_t* }{psz}, \param{size\_t }{n}}
|
||||
|
||||
Converts from Unicode to multibyte filename encoding. Returns the size of the destination buffer.
|
||||
|
38
docs/latex/wx/mbcnvut7.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
|
||||
%
|
||||
% automatically generated by HelpGen from
|
||||
% ../include/wx/strconv.h at 25/Mar/00 10:20:56
|
||||
%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxMBConvUTF7}}\label{wxmbconvutf7}
|
||||
|
||||
This class converts between the UTF-7 encoding and Unicode.
|
||||
It has one predefined instance, {\bf wxConvUTF7}.
|
||||
Unfortunately, this class is not quite implemented yet.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxMBConv}{wxmbconv}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/strconv.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxMBConvUTF8}{wxmbconvutf8},
|
||||
\helpref{wxMBConv classes overview}{mbconvclasses}
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMBConvUTF7::MB2WC}\label{wxmbconvutf7mb2wc}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{size\_t}{MB2WC}{\param{wchar\_t* }{buf}, \param{const char* }{psz}, \param{size\_t }{n}}
|
||||
|
||||
Converts from UTF-7 encoding to Unicode. Returns the size of the destination buffer.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMBConvUTF7::WC2MB}\label{wxmbconvutf7wc2mb}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{size\_t}{WC2MB}{\param{char* }{buf}, \param{const wchar\_t* }{psz}, \param{size\_t }{n}}
|
||||
|
||||
Converts from Unicode to UTF-7 encoding. Returns the size of the destination buffer.
|
||||
|
59
docs/latex/wx/mbcnvut8.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
%
|
||||
% automatically generated by HelpGen from
|
||||
% ../include/wx/strconv.h at 25/Mar/00 10:20:56
|
||||
%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxMBConvUTF8}}\label{wxmbconvutf8}
|
||||
|
||||
This class converts between the UTF-8 encoding and Unicode.
|
||||
It has one predefined instance, {\bf wxConvUTF8}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxMBConv}{wxmbconv}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/strconv.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxMBConvUTF7}{wxmbconvutf7},
|
||||
\helpref{wxMBConv classes overview}{mbconvclasses}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
UTF-8 is a compatibility encoding used to encode Unicode text into anything that was
|
||||
originally written for 8-bit strings, including (but not limited to) filenames, transfer
|
||||
protocols, and database fields. Notable properties include:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{itemize}
|
||||
\item Variable-length encoding able to encode up to 31 bits per character
|
||||
\item ASCII characters (character values under 128) are encoded as plain ASCII
|
||||
(1 byte per character)
|
||||
\item Null bytes do not occur in the encoding, except when there's an actual Unicode
|
||||
null character
|
||||
\item Preserves sort ordering for plain 8-bit comparison routines like strcmp()
|
||||
\item High bit patterns unambiguates character boundaries, and makes it easy to
|
||||
detect whether a string is encoded with UTF-8 or not
|
||||
\end{itemize}
|
||||
|
||||
All of these properties make UTF-8 a very favorable solution in any situation
|
||||
where full Unicode character support is desired while remaining compatible with
|
||||
code written with only 8-bit extended-ASCII characters in mind.
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMBConvUTF8::MB2WC}\label{wxmbconvutf8mb2wc}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{size\_t}{MB2WC}{\param{wchar\_t* }{buf}, \param{const char* }{psz}, \param{size\_t }{n}}
|
||||
|
||||
Converts from UTF-8 encoding to Unicode. Returns the size of the destination buffer.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMBConvUTF8::WC2MB}\label{wxmbconvutf8wc2mb}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{size\_t}{WC2MB}{\param{char* }{buf}, \param{const wchar\_t* }{psz}, \param{size\_t }{n}}
|
||||
|
||||
Converts from Unicode to UTF-8 encoding. Returns the size of the destination buffer.
|
||||
|
108
docs/latex/wx/mbconv.tex
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
|
||||
%
|
||||
% automatically generated by HelpGen from
|
||||
% ../include/wx/strconv.h at 25/Mar/00 10:20:56
|
||||
%
|
||||
|
||||
\section{\class{wxMBConv}}\label{wxmbconv}
|
||||
|
||||
This class is the base class of a hierarchy of classes capable of converting
|
||||
text strings between multibyte (SBCS or DBCS) encodings and Unicode. It is itself
|
||||
a wrapper around the standard libc mbstowcs() and wcstombs() routines, and has
|
||||
one predefined instance, {\bf wxConvLibc}.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
No base class
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Include files}
|
||||
|
||||
<wx/strconv.h>
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxCSConv}{wxcsconv},
|
||||
\helpref{wxEncodingConverter}{wxencodingconverter},
|
||||
\helpref{wxMBConv classes overview}{mbconvclasses}
|
||||
|
||||
\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMBConv::wxMBConv}\label{wxmbconvwxmbconv}
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxMBConv}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMBConv::MB2WC}\label{wxmbconvmb2wc}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{virtual size\_t}{MB2WC}{\param{wchar\_t* }{buf}, \param{const char* }{psz}, \param{size\_t }{n}}
|
||||
|
||||
Converts from multibyte encoding to Unicode, using the libc routine mbstowcs()
|
||||
(this is overridden by derived classes). Returns the size of the destination buffer.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMBConv::WC2MB}\label{wxmbconvwc2mb}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{virtual size\_t}{WC2MB}{\param{char* }{buf}, \param{const wchar\_t* }{psz}, \param{size\_t }{n}}
|
||||
|
||||
Converts from Unicode to multibyte encoding, using the libc routine wcstombs()
|
||||
(this is overridden by derived classes). Returns the size of the destination buffer.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMBConv::cMB2WC}\label{wxmbconvcmb2wc}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxWCharBuffer}{cMB2WC}{\param{const char* }{psz}}
|
||||
|
||||
Converts from multibyte encoding to Unicode by calling MB2WC,
|
||||
allocating a temporary wxWCharBuffer to hold the result.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMBConv::cWC2MB}\label{wxmbconvcwc2mb}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxCharBuffer}{cWC2MB}{\param{const wchar\_t* }{psz}}
|
||||
|
||||
Converts from Unicode to multibyte encoding by calling WC2MB,
|
||||
allocating a temporary wxCharBuffer to hold the result.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMBConv::cMB2WX}\label{wxmbconvcmb2wx}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const char*}{cMB2WX}{\param{const char* }{psz}}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxWCharBuffer}{cMB2WX}{\param{const char* }{psz}}
|
||||
|
||||
Converts from multibyte encoding to the current wxChar type
|
||||
(which depends on whether wxUSE\_UNICODE is set to 1). If wxChar is char,
|
||||
it returns the parameter unaltered. If wxChar is wchar\_t, it returns the
|
||||
result in a wxWCharBuffer. The macro wxMB2WXbuf is defined as the correct
|
||||
return type (without const).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMBConv::cWX2MB}\label{wxmbconvcwx2mb}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const char*}{cWX2MB}{\param{const wxChar* }{psz}}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxCharBuffer}{cWX2MB}{\param{const wxChar* }{psz}}
|
||||
|
||||
Converts from the current wxChar type to multibyte encoding. If wxChar is char,
|
||||
it returns the parameter unaltered. If wxChar is wchar\_t, it returns the
|
||||
result in a wxCharBuffer. The macro wxWX2MBbuf is defined as the correct
|
||||
return type (without const).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMBConv::cWC2WX}\label{wxmbconvcwc2wx}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wchar\_t*}{cWC2WX}{\param{const wchar\_t* }{psz}}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxCharBuffer}{cWC2WX}{\param{const wchar\_t* }{psz}}
|
||||
|
||||
Converts from Unicode to the current wxChar type. If wxChar is wchar\_t,
|
||||
it returns the parameter unaltered. If wxChar is char, it returns the
|
||||
result in a wxCharBuffer. The macro wxWC2WXbuf is defined as the correct
|
||||
return type (without const).
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMBConv::cWX2WC}\label{wxmbconvcwx2wc}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wchar\_t*}{cWX2WC}{\param{const wxChar* }{psz}}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{const wxWCharBuffer}{cWX2WC}{\param{const wxChar* }{psz}}
|
||||
|
||||
Converts from the current wxChar type to Unicode. If wxChar is wchar\_t,
|
||||
it returns the parameter unaltered. If wxChar is char, it returns the
|
||||
result in a wxWCharBuffer. The macro wxWX2WCbuf is defined as the correct
|
||||
return type (without const).
|
||||
|
@@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Child frames may be either \helpref{wxMDIChildFrame}{wxmdichildframe}, or \helpr
|
||||
|
||||
An MDI parent frame always has a \helpref{wxMDIClientWindow}{wxmdiclientwindow} associated with it, which
|
||||
is the parent for MDI client frames.
|
||||
This client window may be resized to accomodate non-MDI windows, as seen in Microsoft Visual C++ (TM) and
|
||||
This client window may be resized to accommodate non-MDI windows, as seen in Microsoft Visual C++ (TM) and
|
||||
Microsoft Publisher (TM), where a documentation window is placed to one side of the workspace.
|
||||
|
||||
MDI remains popular despite dire warnings from Microsoft itself that MDI is an obsolete
|
||||
@@ -476,7 +476,14 @@ is available under Windows only.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{virtual wxMDIClientWindow*}{OnCreateClient}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
Override this to return a different kind of client window.
|
||||
Override this to return a different kind of client window. If you override this function,
|
||||
you must create your parent frame in two stages, or your function will never be called,
|
||||
due to the way C++ treats virtual functions called from constructors. For example:
|
||||
|
||||
\begin{verbatim}
|
||||
frame = new MyParentFrame;
|
||||
frame->Create(parent, myParentFrameId, wxT("My Parent Frame"));
|
||||
\end{verbatim}
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Remarks}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -486,7 +493,7 @@ on the background.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that it is probably impossible to have a client window that scrolls as well as painting
|
||||
a bitmap or pattern, since in {\bf OnScroll}, the scrollbar positions always return zero.
|
||||
(Solutions to: \verb$julian.smart@ukonline.co.uk$).
|
||||
(Solutions to: \verb$julian.smart@btopenworld.com$).
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ Adds the item to the end of the menu bar.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE on success, FALSE if an error occured.
|
||||
TRUE on success, FALSE if an error occurred.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ position $0$ will insert it in the very beginning of it, inserting at position
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Return value}
|
||||
|
||||
TRUE on success, FALSE if an error occured.
|
||||
TRUE on success, FALSE if an error occurred.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{See also}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -9,6 +9,20 @@ drawbacks: the LEAVE\_WINDOW event might be received some time after the mouse
|
||||
left the window and the state variables for it may have changed during this
|
||||
time.
|
||||
|
||||
{\bf NB: } Note the difference between methods like
|
||||
\helpref{LeftDown}{wxmouseeventleftdown} and
|
||||
\helpref{LeftIsDown}{wxmouseeventleftisdown}: the formet returns {\tt TRUE}
|
||||
when the event corresponds to the left mouse button click while the latter
|
||||
returns {\tt TRUE} if the left mouse button is currently being pressed. For
|
||||
example, when the user is dragging the mouse you can use
|
||||
\helpref{LeftIsDown}{wxmouseeventleftisdown} to test
|
||||
whether the left mouse button is (still) depressed. Also, by convention, if
|
||||
\helpref{LeftDown}{wxmouseeventleftdown} returns {\tt TRUE},
|
||||
\helpref{LeftIsDown}{wxmouseeventleftisdown} will also return {\tt TRUE} in
|
||||
wxWindows whatever the underlying GUI behaviour is (which is
|
||||
platform-dependent). The same applies, of course, to other mouse buttons as
|
||||
well.
|
||||
|
||||
\wxheading{Derived from}
|
||||
|
||||
\helpref{wxEvent}{wxevent}
|
||||
@@ -242,7 +256,7 @@ Returns TRUE if the event was a left double click.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the left mouse button changed to down.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::LeftIsDown}
|
||||
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::LeftIsDown}\label{wxmouseeventleftisdown}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{LeftIsDown}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -281,7 +295,7 @@ Returns TRUE if the event was a middle double click.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the middle mouse button changed to down.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::MiddleIsDown}
|
||||
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::MiddleIsDown}\label{wxmouseeventmiddleisdown}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{MiddleIsDown}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -312,7 +326,7 @@ Returns TRUE if the event was a right double click.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns TRUE if the right mouse button changed to down.
|
||||
|
||||
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::RightIsDown}
|
||||
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::RightIsDown}\label{wxmouseeventrightisdown}
|
||||
|
||||
\constfunc{bool}{RightIsDown}{\void}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -43,10 +43,12 @@ Constructor. Use \helpref{wxMessageDialog::ShowModal}{wxmessagedialogshowmodal}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxOK}}{Show an OK button.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxCANCEL}}{Show a Cancel button.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxYES\_NO}}{Show Yes and No buttons.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wx\_NO\_DEFAULT}}{Used with {\bf wxYES\_NO}, makes {\bf No} button the default.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxYES\_DEFAULT}}{Used with {\bf wxYES\_NO}, makes {\bf Yes} button the default - which is the default behaviour.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxNO\_DEFAULT}}{Used with {\bf wxYES\_NO}, makes {\bf No} button the default.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxCENTRE}}{Centre the message. Not Windows.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxICON\_EXCLAMATION}}{Shows an exclamation mark icon.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxICON\_HAND}}{Shows a hand icon.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxICON\_HAND}}{Shows an error icon.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxICON\_ERROR}}{Shows an error icon - the same as wxICON\_HAND.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxICON\_QUESTION}}{Shows a question mark icon.}
|
||||
\twocolitem{{\bf wxICON\_INFORMATION}}{Shows an information (i) icon.}
|
||||
\end{twocollist}
|
||||
|
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ None.
|
||||
|
||||
\func{}{wxMutexLocker}{\param{wxMutex *}{mutex}}
|
||||
|
||||
Constructs a wxMutexLocker object associated with mutex which must be non NULL
|
||||
Constructs a wxMutexLocker object associated with mutex which must be non-NULL
|
||||
and locks it. Call \helpref{IsLocked}{wxmutexlockerisok} to check if the mutex was
|
||||
successfully locked.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ In order to query the size of notebook page, this page needs to have its
|
||||
own sizer, otherwise the wxNotebookSizer will ignore it. Notebook pages
|
||||
get there sizer by assiging one to them using \helpref{wxWindow::SetSizer}{wxwindowsetsizer}
|
||||
and setting the auto-layout option to TRUE using
|
||||
\helpref{wxWindow::SetAutolayout}{wxwindowsetautoLayout}. Here is one
|
||||
\helpref{wxWindow::SetAutoLayout}{wxwindowsetautolayout}. Here is one
|
||||
example showing how to add a notebook page that the notebook sizer is
|
||||
aware of:
|
||||
|
||||
|